Officejet Enterprise Color X555/X585 Troubleshooting Manual Enww HP MFP X585, X555
User Manual: HP Officejet Enterprise Color MFP X585, X555 Troubleshooting shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/HP/Ink/
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 338
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Officejet Enterprise Color X555 Officejet Enterprise Color MFP X585 Troubleshooting Manual shift caps lock A Z @ S X alt D C F V G B H N J www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585 K M alt , L : ; . / ? ‘ “ shift enter HP Officejet Enterprise Color X555 and MFP X585 Series Troubleshooting Manual Copyright and License Trademark Credits © 2014 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Edition 1, 4/2014 Conventions used in this guide TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts. NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task. CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product. WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product. ENWW iii iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW Table of contents 1 Theory of operation ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Basic operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 Function structure ............................................................................................................................... 2 Operation sequence ............................................................................................................................ 4 System control ....................................................................................................................................................... 7 Formatter and data path ..................................................................................................................... 7 Engine control ..................................................................................................................................... 8 Pen interface (I/F) .............................................................................................................................. 10 Power supply ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Print subsystem ................................................................................................................................................... 12 Printbar .............................................................................................................................................. 13 Printbar lift ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Ink cartridges ..................................................................................................................................... 15 Optical scan carriage ......................................................................................................................... 15 Print system operational states ....................................................................................................... 15 Paper-handling system ....................................................................................................................................... 17 Input trays ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Paper path zones .............................................................................................................................. 24 Servicing system .................................................................................................................................................. 28 Service sled ....................................................................................................................................... 30 Aerosol management system ............................................................................................................................. 31 Document feeder (X585 models) ........................................................................................................................ 33 Document feeder operation .............................................................................................................. 33 Document feeder paper path and sensors ....................................................................................... 33 Document feeder jam detection ....................................................................................................... 34 Scanner system (X585 models) .......................................................................................................................... 35 Scanner power-on sequence of events ............................................................................................ 35 Copy or scan-to-computer sequence of events ............................................................................... 36 Fax functions and operation (X585 models) ....................................................................................................... 37 Computer and network security features ........................................................................................ 37 PSTN operation ................................................................................................................................. 37 The fax subsystem ............................................................................................................................ 37 ENWW v Fax card in the fax subsystem .......................................................................................................... 37 Fax page storage in flash memory ................................................................................................... 39 2 Solve problems ........................................................................................................................................... 41 Problem-solving checklist ................................................................................................................................... 42 Step 1: Check that the product power is on ...................................................................................... 42 Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages ........................................................................ 42 Step 3: Test print functionality ......................................................................................................... 43 Step 4: Test copy functionality ......................................................................................................... 43 Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality ........................................................................................ 43 Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality ...................................................................................... 43 Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer .............................................................................. 43 Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality ..................................................... 44 Factors that affect product performance ......................................................................................... 44 Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................... 45 Determine the problem source ......................................................................................................... 45 Power subsystem .............................................................................................................................. 46 Scanning subsystem (X585) ............................................................................................................. 47 Control panel checks ......................................................................................................................... 47 Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... 57 Print the configuration page ............................................................................................................. 57 Event log messages .......................................................................................................................... 59 Error messages ................................................................................................................................. 60 Individual component diagnostics .................................................................................................. 149 Diagrams ......................................................................................................................................... 154 Print-quality troubleshooting tools ............................................................................................... 156 Preboot menu options .................................................................................................................... 164 Control-panel menus ........................................................................................................................................ 172 Administration menu ...................................................................................................................... 172 Device Maintenance menu .............................................................................................................. 233 Solve image quality problems .......................................................................................................................... 236 Clean ink smears ............................................................................................................................. 236 Recover the printhead .................................................................................................................... 236 Solve paper jam or feed problems .................................................................................................................... 237 Product does not pick up paper or misfeeds .................................................................................. 237 Clear jams ........................................................................................................................................ 238 Solve performance problems ............................................................................................................................ 254 The product does not print ............................................................................................................. 254 The product prints slowly ............................................................................................................... 254 Solve connectivity problems ............................................................................................................................. 256 Solve USB direct-connect problems ............................................................................................... 256 vi ENWW Solve network problems ................................................................................................................. 256 Solve wireless network problems .................................................................................................. 257 Service mode functions ..................................................................................................................................... 262 Service menu and Secondary service menu ................................................................................... 262 Product resets ................................................................................................................................. 262 Solve fax problems ............................................................................................................................................ 263 Fax reports ...................................................................................................................................... 263 Possible fax issues .......................................................................................................................... 266 Product upgrades .............................................................................................................................................. 275 Appendix A Service and support .................................................................................................................... 277 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ................................................................................................. 278 UK, Ireland, and Malta ..................................................................................................................... 279 Austria, Belgium, Germany, and Luxemburg .................................................................................. 279 Belgium, France, and Luxemburg ................................................................................................... 279 Italy .................................................................................................................................................. 281 Spain ................................................................................................................................................ 281 Denmark .......................................................................................................................................... 281 Norway ............................................................................................................................................ 281 Sweden ............................................................................................................................................ 282 Portugal ........................................................................................................................................... 282 Greece and Cyprus ........................................................................................................................... 282 Hungary ........................................................................................................................................... 282 Czech Republic ................................................................................................................................ 282 Slovakia ........................................................................................................................................... 283 Poland ............................................................................................................................................. 283 Bulgaria ........................................................................................................................................... 283 Romania .......................................................................................................................................... 283 Belgium and The Netherlands ........................................................................................................ 283 Finland ............................................................................................................................................. 284 Slovenia ........................................................................................................................................... 284 Croatia ............................................................................................................................................. 284 Latvia ............................................................................................................................................... 284 Lithuania .......................................................................................................................................... 284 Estonia ............................................................................................................................................. 285 End User License Agreement ............................................................................................................................ 286 OpenSSL ............................................................................................................................................................. 288 Customer self-repair warranty service ............................................................................................................. 289 Customer support .............................................................................................................................................. 290 ENWW vii Appendix B Product specifications ................................................................................................................. 291 Physical specifications (X555 models) ............................................................................................................. 292 Physical specifications (X585 models) ............................................................................................................. 292 Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .......................................................... 292 Environmental specifications ............................................................................................................................ 292 Appendix C Regulatory information ............................................................................................................... 293 FCC regulations .................................................................................................................................................. 294 Environmental product stewardship program ................................................................................................. 295 Protecting the environment ........................................................................................................... 295 Ozone production ............................................................................................................................ 295 Power consumption ........................................................................................................................ 295 Paper use ......................................................................................................................................... 295 Plastics ............................................................................................................................................ 295 HP Officejet print supplies .............................................................................................................. 295 Return and recycling instructions ................................................................................................... 296 Paper ............................................................................................................................................... 297 Material restrictions ........................................................................................................................ 297 Disposal of waste equipment by users ........................................................................................... 297 Electronic hardware recycling ........................................................................................................ 298 Chemical substances ....................................................................................................................... 298 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................................ 298 EPEAT .............................................................................................................................................. 298 For more information ...................................................................................................................... 298 Declaration of conformity (X555 models) ........................................................................................................ 299 Declaration of conformity (X585dn model) ...................................................................................................... 301 Declaration of conformity (X585f and X585z models) ..................................................................................... 303 Certificate of volatility (X555 models) .............................................................................................................. 305 Certificate of volatility (X585 models) .............................................................................................................. 307 Safety statements ............................................................................................................................................. 309 Canada - Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Statement ......................................................... 309 VCCI statement (Japan) ................................................................................................................... 309 Power cord instructions .................................................................................................................. 309 Power cord statement (Japan) ....................................................................................................... 309 EMC statement (China) .................................................................................................................... 309 EMC statement (Korea) ................................................................................................................... 309 EMI statement (Taiwan) .................................................................................................................. 310 GS statement (Germany) ................................................................................................................ 311 Substances Table (China) ................................................................................................................ 311 SEPA Ecolabel User Information (China) ........................................................................................ 311 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (India) .............................................................. 312 viii ENWW Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) ........................................................... 312 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Ukraine) .......................................................... 312 Eurasian Conformity (Belarus, Kazakhstan, Russia) ...................................................................... 312 Additional statements for telecom (fax) products ........................................................................................... 313 EU Statement for Telecom Operation ............................................................................................ 313 New Zealand Telecom Statements ................................................................................................. 313 Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US) .................................................................... 313 Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) ...................................................................................... 314 Industry Canada CS-03 requirements ............................................................................................ 314 Vietnam Telecom wired/wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products ............................ 315 Japan Telecom Mark ....................................................................................................................... 315 Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 317 ENWW ix x ENWW List of tables Table 1-1 Operation sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 4 Table 1-2 Power supply module operating modes ............................................................................................................ 11 Table 1-3 Printbar components ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Table 1-4 Product sensors ................................................................................................................................................. 20 Table 1-5 Paper-handling system motors ......................................................................................................................... 23 Table 1-6 Paper path zones ............................................................................................................................................... 26 Table 1-7 Service sled components ................................................................................................................................... 30 Table 1-8 Aerosol management system components ...................................................................................................... 32 Table 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart ................................................................................................................................ 45 Table 2-2 Control panel diagnostic functions .................................................................................................................... 47 Table 2-3 Important information on the configuration pages .......................................................................................... 59 Table 2-4 Heartbeat LED status ....................................................................................................................................... 150 Table 2-5 Plug/jack locations (X555) ............................................................................................................................... 154 Table 2-6 Plug/jack locations (X585) ............................................................................................................................... 155 Table 2-7 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) ......................................................................................................................... 165 Table 2-8 Preboot menu options (2 of 6) ......................................................................................................................... 167 Table 2-9 Preboot menu options (3 of 6) ......................................................................................................................... 168 Table 2-10 Preboot menu options (4 of 6) ...................................................................................................................... 169 Table 2-11 Preboot menu options (5 of 6) ...................................................................................................................... 169 Table 2-12 Preboot menu options (6 of 6) ...................................................................................................................... 170 Table 2-13 Reports menu ................................................................................................................................................. 172 Table 2-14 General Settings menu .................................................................................................................................. 174 Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) ........................................................................................................................... 179 Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) ...................................................................................................... 185 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) ............................................................................................................................. 195 Table 2-18 General Print Settings menu ......................................................................................................................... 207 Table 2-19 Print Options menu ........................................................................................................................................ 210 Table 2-20 Display Settings menu ................................................................................................................................... 211 Table 2-21 Manage Supplies menu .................................................................................................................................. 213 Table 2-22 Manage Trays menu ....................................................................................................................................... 217 Table 2-23 Network Settings menu ................................................................................................................................. 219 Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 219 ENWW xi Table 2-25 Troubleshooting menu .................................................................................................................................. 230 Table 2-26 Backup/Restore menu ................................................................................................................................... 233 Table 2-27 Calibrate/Cleaning menu ............................................................................................................................... 233 xii Table B-1 Physical specifications (X555 models), with ink cartridges ............................................................................ 292 Table B-2 Physical specifications (X585 models), with ink cartridges ............................................................................ 292 Table B-3 Operating-environment specifications ........................................................................................................... 292 ENWW List of figures Figure 1-1 Main components (X555 models) ....................................................................................................................... 2 Figure 1-2 Main components (X585 models) ....................................................................................................................... 3 Figure 1-3 System control .................................................................................................................................................... 7 Figure 1-4 Print subsystem components (X555 models) .................................................................................................. 12 Figure 1-5 Print subsystem components (X585 models) .................................................................................................. 13 Figure 1-6 Printbar components ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Figure 1-7 Paper-handling system paper path (X555 models) ......................................................................................... 17 Figure 1-8 Paper-handling system paper path (X585 models) ......................................................................................... 18 Figure 1-9 Product sensors (X555 models) ....................................................................................................................... 19 Figure 1-10 Product sensors (X585 models) ..................................................................................................................... 20 Figure 1-11 Paper-handling-system motors (X555 models) ............................................................................................ 22 Figure 1-12 Paper-handling-system motors (X585 models) ............................................................................................ 23 Figure 1-13 Paper path zones (X555 models) ................................................................................................................... 25 Figure 1-14 Paper path zones (X585 models) ................................................................................................................... 26 Figure 1-15 Servicing system components (X555 models) ............................................................................................... 28 Figure 1-16 Servicing system components (X585 models) ............................................................................................... 29 Figure 1-17 Service sled components ................................................................................................................................ 30 Figure 1-18 Aerosol management process ........................................................................................................................ 31 Figure 1-19 Aerosol management system components ................................................................................................... 32 Figure 1-20 Document feeder paper path and sensors ..................................................................................................... 34 Figure 2-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) .................................................................................................. 51 Figure 2-2 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond ...................................................... 52 Figure 2-3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone .......................................................................................................... 53 Figure 2-4 No control panel sound ..................................................................................................................................... 54 Figure 2-5 Home Figure 2-6 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) ........................................... 56 Figure 2-7 Configuration page ........................................................................................................................................... 57 Figure 2-8 HP embedded Jetdirect page ............................................................................................................................ 58 Figure 2-9 LEDs ................................................................................................................................................................. 149 Figure 2-10 Plug/jack locations (X555) ........................................................................................................................... 154 Figure 2-11 Plug/jack locations (X585) ........................................................................................................................... 155 Figure 2-12 Mark the web wipe ........................................................................................................................................ 163 ENWW button is unresponsive ..................................................................................................................... 55 xiii Figure C-1 Certificate of volatility (X555 models) (1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 305 Figure C-2 Certificate of volatility (X555 models) (2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 306 Figure C-3 Certificate of volatility (X585 models) (1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 307 Figure C-4 Certificate of volatility (X585 models) (2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 308 xiv ENWW 1 ENWW Theory of operation ● Basic operation ● System control ● Print subsystem ● Paper-handling system ● Servicing system ● Aerosol management system ● Document feeder (X585 models) ● Scanner system (X585 models) ● Fax functions and operation (X585 models) 1 Basic operation Function structure The product consists of the following components. Figure 1-1 Main components (X555 models) Control panel Output bin Optical scan carriage Printbar Service sled Main input tray (Tray 2) Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) Duplex module\ Waste ink module Optional tray (Tray 3) 2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1-2 Main components (X585 models) Control panel Document feeder Scanner Output bin Optical scan carriage Printbar Service sled Main input tray (Tray 2) Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) Duplex module\ Waste ink module Optional tray (Tray 3) The product contains the following systems: ENWW ● Engine control system ● Print subsystem ● Paper-handling system ● Servicing system Basic operation 3 ● Aerosol management system ● Scanner and document feeder system (X585 models) Two elements influence the product architecture: ● Orienting the printbar with its active face downward and statically located above the print media. This requires the printbar to move vertically to access its active face. ● Producing face-down output. Rather than ejecting the page face-up immediately after the ink is applied, as many inkjet printers do, the printed page is routed up and back over the printbar to eject face-down. Operation sequence The engine-control system on the formatter PCA controls the operational sequences. The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from when the product is turned on to when the motors stop rotating. Table 1-1 Operation sequence Period Duration Purpose Initial startup and calibrations When the product is set up for the first time from the factory. This period gets the product ready to print for the first time. Servicing operations 4 Chapter 1 Theory of operation When the printbar is entering the capping state after printing, when leaving capping state after a print job is initiated, or during extended print jobs. ● The product flushes the shipping and handling fluid out of the printbar and replaces it with ink. ● Die alignment—The product aligns the 10 die on the printbar active face. ● Die density leveling—The product measures and compensates for the drop variation. Servicing maintains the print quality by ensuring debris and excess ink are removed and missing nozzles are replaced. ● Nozzle presence detection—The optical scan carriage detects and disables inoperable nozzles, and replaces them with operable nozzles. ● Printbar servicing—The web wipe on the service sled moves under the printbar to clean the active face and fire the nozzles into the waste ink module to clear clogs. ENWW Table 1-1 Operation sequence (continued) Period Duration Purpose Print preparation From the time the product receives a print command until paper enters the print zone. Prepares the product for a print job. Printing ENWW From the end of the preparation period until the last sheet is delivered. ● The printbar leaves the capping state as the service sled moves away from the printbar. ● If needed, some servicing occurs. ● The printbar lowers to the printing position. The media type and printing mode determine the print zone height. ● The product picks media from one of the input trays. ● Every page from Tray 1 is scanned. For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, the product performs media edge detection after printing the first sheet after the main or optional tray is loaded. The last sheet of each job is also scanned if at least five sheets have been printed. ● The product monitors environmental conditions. The product can decrease the print speed if conditions are significantly different from a normal office environment (23 degrees C (73 degrees F), 50% relative humidity). ● The formatter PCA processes print data and transmits the data to the printbar. Processes the print job. ● As the page travels through the print zone, the printbar applies ink to the page. ● Simplex print job: the page moves up, over the printbar, and out to the output bin (face-down). ● Duplex print job: the page moves up until the trailing edge is 40 mm past the star-wheel jam reflective sensor, then reverses direction down through the duplex path underneath the waste ink module, and then reenters the print zone where the printbar applies ink to the second side. ● The process continues until all the pages of the print job are completed. Occasional nozzle presence detection and servicing events might occur if the job includes many pages. Basic operation 5 Table 1-1 Operation sequence (continued) Period Duration Purpose End of print job Performed after the print job is completed, and continues until the next job is initiated. Puts the product in a state where it’s ready for the next print job. Standby 6 Chapter 1 Theory of operation The product is sitting idle, waiting for the next print job to be initiated. ● If needed, some servicing occurs. ● The printbar moves to the capping position after a short dwell interval. ● The service sled moves to cap the printbar. Conserves energy while the product is sitting idle. Certain functions might be disabled to save power, then are restarted when needed. The product has three sleep modes: ● Idle mode—The printbar is capped and the product is ready to immediately start a new job ● Sleep1 mode—After the product is inactive for about 10 minutes, the control panel dims and the power LED blinks to indicate the unit is in Sleep1. All product functions are available. This setting can be adjusted from the control panel. ● Sleep2 mode—After the product is inactive for a longer period of time (typically 2 hours), the engine controller powers down to minimize power consumption. This setting can be adjusted from the control panel. ENWW System control The system control coordinates all the other systems, according to commands from the formatter. Figure 1-3 System control I/O Formatter Datapath I/O, PDL, UI control ASIC +memory Pen I/F • Pen energy control • Pen voltage sequencing Power supply Scanner/ document feeder (X585 models) Engine control Motor + sensor drive • Signal integrity • Ink-short protection Printbar 40,000 nozzles • Printhead interconnects • Ink supply The system consists of the following major sections: ● Formatter ● Data path ● Engine control ● Pen interface ● Scanner/document feeder (X585 models) ● Power supply The engine control electronics are located on the engine control board (ECB). The formatter PCA is a separate assembly. The fax module (X585 models) is attached to the formatter PCA. Formatter and data path The formatter controller ASIC controls the input/output (I/O) control, the user interface, and the rendering of page description language files into printer-specific commands. Input/output (I/O) control The products support 10/100 Ethernet, a rear USB host port, a rear USB device port, a control panel USB host port, and analog fax port (some X585 models). For Ethernet networks, the formatter PCA uses a separate integrated circuit (Broadcom 57761) to provide the physical network interface. The formatter PCA also controls the USB device and USB host. User interface The products contain either a 4.2-in (X555 models) or an 8-in (X585 models) color graphics display. The control panels include a USB host port for connection to thumb drives. Formatter digital ASIC The formatter digital ASIC has an ARM CPÙ (792 MHz) that executes firmware code that provides high-level device control. The digital ASIC uses a standard PCle interface to pass data to the engine control ASIC. The ENWW System control 7 formatter firmware is located on either a rotating hard disk drive (HDD) or, on some X555 models, a solid state drive (SSD). Additionally, the formatter digital ASIC manages the real-time clock, interfaces to the mass storage controller ASIC, provides control of USB ports, and interfaces with the Ethernet LAN ASIC and fax module. Formatter Ethernet ASIC The formatter Ethernet ASIC connects to the formatter digital ASIC with a PCIe interface to transmit and receive network packets. Formatter mass storage ASIC The formatter mass storage ASIC bridges between the formatter digital ASIC (via PCIe interface) and the mass storage device (via SATA interface). Both HDD and SSD mass storage media are supported. The X585 models all use a rotating media HDD, while the X555 models use either HDD or SSD depending upon the bundle option. Formatter memory Formatter memory is installed on-board and there is no support for additional DIMM memory installation. The size of the memory on the formatter is fixed at 1 GB. Real-time clock The real-time clock (RTC) allows the fax module to time-stamp outgoing faxes. It also determines the elapsed time between printhead and ISS calibration events. The RTC uses a separate device connected to the formatter digital ASIC, along with a crystal and a battery. Engine control The engine controller digital ASIC receives high-level commands from the formatter, and then provides lowlevel control to the print mechanism. The engine controller digital ASIC and its firmware control motors, system sensors, and the printbar. The engine controller analog ASIC integrates motor drivers, voltage regulators, sensor interfaces, and supervisory circuits. Engine controller digital ASIC The engine controller digital ASIC has a high-performance 480 MHz ARM CPU and DSP co-processors that execute firmware code to provide low-level engine control. It also drives the printbar via 15 high-speed LVDS transmission lines, which are routed from the engine PCA to the printbar via two large FFC cables. The engine controller digital ASIC receives pre-rendered data from the formatter digital ASIC over a standard PCle interface. In some product sleep modes, the digital ASIC powers down. If a print job is received while the product is in this mode, power resumes to the digital ASIC, which then must “boot up”. This can take approximately 15 seconds, which will delay the first page out (FPO) time accordingly. This sleep mode typically begins after two hours of product inactivity. Engine controller analog ASIC The engine uses two analog ASICs to generate the system voltages for the engine, drive the engine motors, control various engine sensors, and monitor printbar power delivery for correct operation. The engine has seven motors, some of which are shared with other subsystems: 8 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● Pick motor ● Feed motor ● Duplex motor ● Lift motor ● Eject motor ● Sensor carriage motor ● Aerosol fan motor Each one is a DC motor with encoder feedback, to provide precision servo control. These motors are driven directly by one of the engine analog ASICs. Small DC motors also are used to drive the ISS pump and the aerosol fan. Solenoids actuate the ejection flap and the ISS priming system. The product uses many sensors to track the media as it travels through the paper path. Most of these are optical REDI sensors, which are used in conjunction with mirrors to sense the presence or absence of paper in a particular location. These are carefully aligned and calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors. See the Remove and Replace chapter in the repair manual for more details. Other printed circuit-board assemblies (PCAs) In addition to hosting the system ASICs, the engine PCA is home to many circuits needed to interface to sensors and other sub-system components. In some cases, this circuitry is located on a smaller remote PCA (SLB) to optimize cable interconnects. ● Humidity sensor—The humidity sensor causes the product to adjust printing speed if ambient conditions are outside the optimal humidity range. This sensor is calibrated at the factory to ensure maximum accuracy. ● Temperature sensor—The temperature sensor causes the product to adjust printing speed if ambient conditions are outside the optimal temperature range. In some products, this sensor resides on a separate, remote PCA. ● Main tray presence sensor—The hall-effect sensor that detects if the main tray is properly engaged resides on the back of the engine PCA. A small magnet on the back of the main tray actuates the sensor. If the tray is fully engaged, the magnetic field strength is sufficient to trigger the sensor. Additionally, the product includes the following PCAs: ENWW ● Fax PCA—Governs the product fax module. ● Duplex module presence sensor—A hall-effect sensor that detects that the duplex module is properly seated. ● Power button PCA—Includes the power button and power LED, as well as interface cables to the duplex module presence sensor and the MP tray empty REDI sensor. ● Accessory tray interconnect PCA—Provides communication to optional Tray 3. ● Pick encoder distribution PCA—Includes the pick motor encoder and the pick motor interconnect cable. ● Eject encoder distribution PCA—Includes the eject motor encoder and the interconnect cables to the eject motor and the aerosol fan. System control 9 ● Print zone distribution PCA—Joins interconnect cables to the following sensors: separator REDI, feed motion encoder, main tray empty sensor, feed roller OOPs REDI sensor, and the starwheel jam REDI sensor. ● REDI distribution PCA—Includes hall-effect sensors that detect ink cartridge door and left door positions. It also combines the interconnect cables for the eject jam REDI sensor, the upper drying path REDI sensor, the lower drying path REDI sensor, and the eject flap opto flag sensor. ● Sensor carriage PCA—Includes a carriage motion encoder, a ZIM sensor, and the BDD sensor. ● Printbar lift encoder distribution PCA—This PCA includes the printbar lift motion encoder, and combines interconnect cables to the printbar lift motor, carriage motor, and eject flap solenoid. ● Duplex encoder PCA—Contains the motion encoder for the duplex motor. ● SHAID PCA —Contains interfaces to the out-of-ink sensors for the ink cartridges, and combines the interface cables to the acumen PCA, the ISS pump, and the ISS solenoids. ● Acumen PCA—Contains interfaces to the acumen memory devices for the ink cartridges. Pen interface (I/F) The printbar is the key component that differentiates this product from other inkjet printers. The conventional approach is to print a page in horizontal swaths by moving a “scanning” printhead horizontally over a fixed sheet of paper, advancing the paper a fixed amount, and then printing the next swath. With this product, the paper moves underneath a fixed page-wide printhead in a single smooth motion. Single pass page-wide printing requires that data and power be delivered to the printbar at a very high rate, while also maintaining good control of paper position as it moves past the printhead nozzles. The engine PCA sends power and data to the printbar via two large flat flexible cables (36 and 38 pins). The printbar PCA routes power and data to 10 printhead die, which are attached to the PCA using a flexible tab circuit and wire-bonding process. Electronics control the ink supply station (ISS). The SHAID PCA detects low-ink conditions. It gauges ink levels by electrically sensing the presence of ink and/or ink foam in the X-chamber. The SHAID PCA also collects and distributes electrical signals that drive the push-prime pump(s), engage the solenoids, and read the ink supply acumen data. All are routed through a single 17-pin FFC from the SHAID PCA to the engine PCA. Each ink supply has a memory tag that stores information about its type of ink, the amount of ink remaining, and other critical data. It uses a special authentication scheme to ensure that only genuine HP supplies are used and the product is not damaged by using invalid supplies. Acumen uses a two-line serial bus, which, along with 3.3 V and ground, is cabled via the SHAID PCA to the engine PCA and the engine control digital ASIC. Power supply The power supply module converts 100-240 VAC to 33 VCD and 5.1 VCD to power the system. The 33 V rail goes to the engine and the scanner/document feeder, and the 5.1 V rail is supplies power to the formatter. The power supply module has a sleep mode that reduces power consumption in system low-power modes. The power supply module has four operating modes, depending on certain control signals, as outlined in the table below. The power supply has a power factor correction (PFC) circuit to improve efficiency when the system is in the active mode. 10 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1-2 Power supply module operating modes Mode n33V_OFF input signal nPFC_OFF input signal PFC Status 33 V rail status 5.1 V rail status OFF Low Low Off Off On Sleep 2 Low Low Off Off On Sleep 1 High Low Off On On Active High High On On On The power supply is a self-contained module that can be replaced if it is defective (see the Remove and Replace chapter of the Repair Manual). To ensure safe operation, the power supply will “latch off” if a persistent over-current fault condition exists. This is typically caused by a short-circuit from 33 V or 5.1 V to ground in the product. Less severe faults also can cause the power supply to latch off, if present for an extended period of time, or if the product is operated above the recommended operating range. ENWW System control 11 Print subsystem The print subsystem includes the following components: ● Printbar ● Printbar lift ● Ink cartridges ● Optical scan carriage Figure 1-4 Print subsystem components (X555 models) Ink cartridges Optical scan carriage Printbar lift Printbar 12 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1-5 Print subsystem components (X585 models) Ink cartridges Optical scan carriage Printbar lift Printbar Printbar The printbar converts the digital firing instructions from the product electronics into properly formed and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors. The printbar spans the full width of a letter/A4-size sheet (216 mm (8.5 in)), which allows it to be statically positioned within the product and have the media move underneath it, printing the entire page in a single motion. ENWW Print subsystem 13 Figure 1-6 Printbar components 1 4 3 2 Table 1-3 Printbar components Item Description 1 Ink cartridge connections 2 Thermal inkjet (TIJ) die array 3 Data/power flow and regulation 4 Inkflow channels and pressure regulation The printbar has a fixed array of 10 thermal inkjet (TIJ) die oriented in two staggered rows. Each die contains over one thousand nozzles for each of the four ink colors (black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y)). Behind the die array are the ink flow channels and pressure regulation mechanisms that supply the die array with ink at the proper pressure and flow. Onboard electronic circuitry feeds power and data to the die at the appropriate levels and rates. Four ink cartridge receptacles, one for each color, are located at the top of the printbar. Flow connections link these cartridges to the rest of the printbar to supply the ink necessary for its operation. A sensor technology called back-scatter drop detect (BDD) monitors printbar health and calibrations. This system looks at the reflection of the miniscule drops in flight and passes these signals through proprietary, advanced high-speed, high-gain, bandpass filters. An artificial intelligence (AI) system decides which drop ejectors are currently in or out of specifications. After the AI system determines which drop ejectors are out of specification, the product compensates for them. Some ejectors use neighboring nozzles and at times even tiny amounts of other inks – whichever combination of methods necessary to deliver the best print quality possible at that moment. Up to half of the nozzles can be “out” without a noticeable degradation in quality. The compensation is done in real time with a dedicated high-speed DSP. The system can scan portions of the system after print jobs, but it is fully interruptible by new incoming print jobs. Printbar lift The printbar lift positions the printbar within the product and moves it up and down as required. This vertical motion establishes proper spacing to the paper during printing. It also raises the printbar to access the active face or perform necessary calibrations. 14 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW During printing, the lift mechanism sets the printbar height and paper height depending on the type of paper. Ink cartridges This product has new, state-of-the-art pigmented inks. They are filtered using proprietary processes to prevent printhead contamination. These inks are designed to produce optimal print quality on ColorLok office papers, but also produce very good print quality on regular office papers and specialty media. Optical scan carriage The optical scan carriage has optical sensors used for calibration. Its motion is along the long axis of the printbar. These sensors are used by a number of in-printer calibration features that are important for proper subsystem function. The BDD sensor is located on the optical scan carriage. Print system operational states The print subsystem has a number of distinct operational states besides active printing. Startup As it comes from the factory, the printbar is initially filled with an inert ink-substitute called Shipping and Handling Fluid (SHF). This fluid, essential for the manufacture and transportation of the printbar, must be flushed and replaced with actual ink. This is accomplished during the Startup phase. The flushing process automatically commences when ink supplies are inserted and the unit powered up for the first time. The SHF is removed by sustained printbar operation and replaced by ink from the supplies. The process terminates once all the SHF has been flushed from the printbar. Special host supplies are supplied with the product prior to its first use. These supplies contain additional ink so that there will be 100 percent ink level after the SHF is replaced with ink. These supplies can be used only to initialize the product. You cannot use them in another product that has been initialized. NOTE: The initial startup time is noticeably longer than the following regular startup times. Die alignment Die alignment is done by printing a special diagnostic image on a sheet of paper and then scanning it with the optical scan carriage. It is performed as part of initial unit startup, and can be manually invoked as part of the print quality recovery tool. Die alignment calibrates the positions of the 10 die. It also allows a uniform application of ink to the media, without gaps or overlaps between adjacent die. Die density leveling A set of diagnostic images is printed and scanned by the optical scan carriage to achieve uniform application of ink droplets to the media. Die alignment and die density leveling are usually paired together. Nozzle presence detection In printing, since all the ink is applied in a single smooth motion of the media past the printbar, any inoperable nozzle can show up as a streak. The operational state of each of the thousands of nozzles on the printbar is periodically measured. The printbar is raised by the printbar lift, and the BDD assembly on the optical scan carriage watches for drop presence as each nozzle is fired. Inoperable nozzles are turned off and other operable nozzles used on subsequent printed pages to apply the missing ink. Nozzle presence detection is fully interruptible by new incoming print jobs. ENWW Print subsystem 15 Media edge position detection The product uses a learning algorithm to define media center as a function of input source—multipurpose tray, main tray, or accessory tray. The edge scan is located downstream of the print zone. As media is scanned, the media center database is updated. The image is registered to the page using the media center database. Servicing and capping When in the capped state, the printbar is fully raised, the service sled is positioned underneath, and the printbar cap is engaged against the printbar active face. Servicing—the cleaning of the active face and the firing of the nozzles—can occur either during Sleep2 mode or after extended time in storage. It can also occur during extended print jobs. Printing The printing state begins by the printbar leaving the capping state, and being lowered to the printing position after the service sled moves out of the way. At the same time, a sheet of media is picked from one of the three trays and the leading edge staged at the entrance to the print zone. Once the print data has been sent, the media sheet is fed at a constant velocity through the print zone and the ink applied by the printbar. In the case of one-sided printing the inked sheet is conducted up, over and out to the output tray. For twosided printing the sheet is moved until its trailing edge is past the merge to the vertical path, and then it is reversed down through the duplex path underneath the waste ink module, and reintroduced into the print zone for inking of the second side. This process continues until all the pages of the print job are completed, perhaps being interrupted by servicing events if the job is many pages. 16 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Paper-handling system The paper-handling system moves paper through the product according to commands from the formatter. The following figure shows the product paper path. Figure 1-7 Paper-handling system paper path (X555 models) ENWW Paper-handling system 17 Figure 1-8 Paper-handling system paper path (X585 models) The paper path consists of the following major components: 18 ● Two integrated input trays plus one optional accessory tray ● Four motors and a solenoid plus two more motors in the accessory tray ● Duplex module ● Fourteen sensors plus four more sensors in the accessory tray Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● Feed rollers, pinch rollers, star wheels, and media guides ● Transmission components (gears, shafts, levers, swing arms) that interface with other subsystems such as the printbar and service sled. Components of the paper path move the paper from the input tray to a position 1 to 2 mm underneath the printbar, and then deliver the printed result to the output tray. The combined orientations and actions of the printbar, the printbar lift, and the paper path establish the print-zone, where the ink drops move from the active face of the printbar to the paper. The following figure shows the product sensors. Figure 1-9 Product sensors (X555 models) 24 1 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 2 3 16 15 14 13 12 ENWW 11 10 9 8 9997 6 5 4 Paper-handling system 19 Figure 1-10 Product sensors (X585 models) 24 1 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 2 3 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 9997 6 5 4 Table 1-4 Product sensors 20 Item Description Item Description 1 Output flap jam sensor 13 Feed roller jam sensor 2 Ambient temperature sensor 14 Feed roller encoder 3 Ambient humidity sensor 15 Feed roller home sensor Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1-4 Product sensors (continued) Item Description Item Description 4 Tray 2 pickup tire home sensor 16 Duplex module presence sensor 5 Tray 2 tray presence sensor 17 Star-wheel jam sensor 6 Tray 3 pickup tire home sensor 18 Back-scatter drop detect sensor 7 Tray 3 paper presence sensor 19 Print calibration/Media edge detect sensor 8 Tray 3 separation sensor 20 Lower left door jam sensor 9 Tray 2 paper presence sensor 21 Left door open sensor 10 Tray 3 tray presence sensor 22 Upper left door jam sensor 11 Tray 1 paper presence sensor 23 Ink supply door open sensor 12 Tray 3 cleanout presence sensor 24 Eject jam sensor There are several motors in the product for pick, feed, duplexing, printbar lift, delivery, and the scanning sensor carriage. ENWW Paper-handling system 21 Figure 1-11 Paper-handling-system motors (X555 models) 1 8 7 6 5 4 22 Chapter 1 Theory of operation 3 2 ENWW Figure 1-12 Paper-handling-system motors (X585 models) 8 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 Table 1-5 Paper-handling system motors ENWW Item Description 1 Eject (or output drive) motor 2 Tray 2 pickup motor 3 Tray 3 pickup motor Paper-handling system 23 Table 1-5 Paper-handling system motors (continued) Item Description 4 Duplex Tray 1 motor 5 Tray 3 feed motor 6 Feed motor 7 Optical carriage motor 8 Printbar lift motor Input trays The product comes standard with two input trays, and also accepts an accessory tray. ● 50-page multipurpose (MP) tray—Tray 1: The tray shares a motor with the duplex module and has one sensor. This reflective (REDI) sensor determines if media is present in the tray. The feed roller REDI sensor determines if a sheet of media is successfully picked from the tray. ● 500-sheet letter/A4 size main tray—Tray 2: The tray has a pick motor, which is also moves the service sled. Both the main tray motor and the duplex MP tray motor operate at the same time when picking paper from the main tray. The main tray has three sensors: ◦ A hall effect sensor determines if the tray is closed. ◦ A flag/opto sensor determines if there is media in the tray. ◦ A flag/opto sensor determines if the pick roller is in home position. The feed roller jam sensor determines if a sheet of media is successfully picked from the main tray. ● Optional 500-sheet legal size accessory tray—Tray 3: This optional tray has two motors, one for picking paper and one for the turn roller. The turn roller receives paper from the pickup roller and transfers it to the multipurpose tray ITR that is driven by the duplex module/MP tray motor. Both the accessory tray motor and the duplex module/MP tray motor operate at the same time when picking paper out of the accessory tray. The accessory tray has the following sensors: ◦ A hall effect sensor detects if the tray is closed. ◦ A flag/opto sensor detects if there is media in the tray. ◦ A flag/opto sensor detects if the pickup roller is in home position. ◦ A hall effect sensor detects if the left door is closed. ◦ A separation sensor detects if the product successfully picked media. Paper path zones The product paper path includes the following elements. 24 ● Deskew buckle ● Print zone Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ● Duplex ● Output ● Eject Figure 1-13 Paper path zones (X555 models) 5 1 4 3 2 ENWW Paper-handling system 25 Figure 1-14 Paper path zones (X585 models) 5 1 4 3 2 Table 1-6 Paper path zones 26 Item Zone Description 1 Deskew buckle This is the area between the turn roller and feed roller. All print job paper passes through this zone. During the deskew operation, the duplex module/MP tray motor rotates forward, driving the paper into the feed roller nip while the feed roller is not moving. The feed roller REDI sensor determines the leading edge for accurate deskew buckle size, jam detection, and if the tray successfully picked media. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Table 1-6 Paper path zones (continued) Item Zone Description 2 Print zone This is the path between the feed roller and output pinch 1 roller. The feed roller, which has an analog quadrature encoder, precisely controls the paper in the paper feed direction . In the vertical direction, a combination of the platen, feed roller, and output pinch roller 1 controls the paper. The user can rotate the platen down for jam access after removing the duplex module. There are no paper path sensors in the print zone. If a jam occurs in the print zone, it is not detected until the leading edge of the paper is determined to be “late” in reaching the jam sensor in the output path. When a user pulls on jammed media in the print zone that is still partially in the feed roller nip, the servo control will detect a slight movement of the feed roller and assist the user by applying a forward torque to the roller. Also, the motion control system will disengage the duplex module rectifier (swing arm) so that the turn roller can spin freely. This feature reduces the pulling force needed by the user and therefore reduces the chance of leaving torn pieces of paper in the path— especially in the deskew buckle zone. 3 Duplex By opening the left door, the duplex module can be removed to clear jams. The duplex module also serves as waste collection unit for the print bar and will expose the user to waste ink when it is removed. Therefore there are warnings on the module to not touch certain areas. When the user pulls on jammed media from the duplex module (or any of the trays) that is partially in the feed roller nip, the servo control detects a slight movement of the feed roller and assists the user by applying a reverse torque to the feed roller and disengages. Also, the motion control system disengages the duplex module rectifier so the turn roller can spin freely. This feature reduces the pulling force needed by the user and therefore reduces the chance of leaving torn pieces of paper in the path—especially in the deskew buckle zone. In order for the product to determine the duplex module's presence, the duplex module has a magnet that triggers a hall effect sensor mounted to the structure. 4 Output The output path begins at output pinch roller 1 and continues to output pinch roller 5. There are four REDI sensors in this path that detect leading and trailing edges and jams. The feed motor drives the rollers in the output path, except output pinch roller 5. All the pinch rollers in the output and exit path are star wheels to prevent roller tracking on wet/damp ink. However, the turn roller pinch is solid and has a high amount of force for deskew buckle formation. Also, the feed motor drives all output shafts except shafts 5 and 6. The REDI dry path lower, REDI dry path upper, and eject jam REDI sensor in the output path all track the leading and trailing edges of media. The outer and top portions of the vertical path are formed by paper guides molded in and attached to the left door. The left door can be opened for jam clearance and has a hall effect sensor to determine if it is closed. Also when the left door is opened, drive rollers that form pinches 3 and 4 disengage from the feed motor for safety purposes. 5 Eject The eject portion of the paper path includes the zone from output pinch roller 5 to the eject flap. The eject motor powers output pinch roller 5 and eject pinch roller 6. The eject flap has 3 positions: ● Closed when not printing. ● Partially open for heavy ink printing in dry environments, to limit severe curl. ● Ofpen for all other printing. This position controls moderately curled media. The flap is opened and closed by a torque clutch on the eject roller shaft. The flap also has a locking feature that is controlled by a solenoid. In order for the door to open all the way, or move between positions, the solenoid must be actuated. ENWW Paper-handling system 27 Servicing system The servicing system comprises the service sled, which maintains print quality by wiping debris and ink off the print nozzles, and the service ink module, where waste ink is deposited. Figure 1-15 Servicing system components (X555 models) Service sled Duplex module\ Waste ink module 28 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1-16 Servicing system components (X585 models) Service sled Duplex module\ Waste ink module ENWW Servicing system 29 Service sled Figure 1-17 Service sled components 4 1 2 3 Table 1-7 Service sled components Item Description 1 Service sled cap 2 Service sled wiping surface 3 Service sled web fabric loop 4 Printbar support posts The service sled system keeps the printbar nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the product as it performs the wiping and capping functions. ● The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue and particulates. ● The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage when the product is idle. The service sled system uses the pick drive system (a component of the paper path) for horizontal motion to perform its functions. To perform the wiping function, the product moves the service sled underneath the printbar (which is elevated from the print position) so that the web fabric makes contact with the ink nozzles. The web fabric is a looped belt that advances after every wipe. Since the belt is a finite loop, it will eventually reuse previously used material. The web advances when the web wipe module moves to the right out of the print zone. The advance mechanism is triggered by a mechanism located on the rear wall of the unit. To perform the capping function, the service sled moves underneath the printbar (which is elevated from the print position), which allows the rubber cap to seal the print nozzles from the environment. 30 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Aerosol management system The aerosol management system consists of a fan module and filter box to keep ink aerosol from building up inside the product. The following figure shows the service ink and aerosol capture system components. Figure 1-18 Aerosol management process Aerosol blower Printbar Paper Platen Duplex module Spit Roller Duct Absorbers Service ink capture (in duplex module) Aerosol filter Between pages, printed aerosol is drawn though the platen openings. Service ink travels directly through the platen, impacting and collecting on the spit roller. Aerosol from the service spitting is also collected. Service ink collects in the duplex module, and a porous filter element captures the aerosol as aerosol-laden air passes though it. The aerosol blower mounted to the filter housing creates the air motion (suction—lower pressure—in the print zone). Most of printbar servicing ink (spit ink) is captured by the spit roller and scraped into the bottom of the bucket on the duplex module. The service ink spit roller is indexed slowly by the motion of paper though the product, driven by the swing-arm and turn-roller gear train, with power provided by the duplex motor. When the product purges the printbar of its shipping fluid at initial startup, absorbers in the duplex module collect the fluid. These absorbers allow much of the initial water to evaporate from the shipping fluid over time. Also, they allow service ink coming into contact with the absorbers to leach some of their fluids into them, assisting with drying and thickening of the sludge. The blower remains active as long as the printbar is uncapped, and it continues to operate for a few seconds after capping is complete. ENWW Aerosol management system 31 Figure 1-19 Aerosol management system components 1 4 3 2 Table 1-8 Aerosol management system components 32 Item Description 1 Blower 2 Aerosol filter housing 3 Duplex module/waste ink module 4 Platen Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Document feeder (X585 models) Document feeder operation Standby (paper-loading) mode: In standby mode, the pickup roller is up and the stack-stop is down, preventing the user from inserting the original document too far. When a document is inserted correctly, the paper-present sensor detects its presence. The standard operation of the document feeder consists of the pick, feed, and lift steps. Pick: When it receives a copy or scan command, the document feeder motor engages the gear train to lower the pickup-roller assembly and raise the stack-stop. The pre-pick roller moves the top few sheets forward into the document feeder. The pickup roller contacts the document feeder separation pad, which separates multiple pages into single sheets. Feed: The form sensor, which is a set distance from the document feeder glass, detects the sheet. This alerts the scanner to start when the page reaches the glass. The scanner acquires the image until it detects the end of the page. The page is then ejected. The pick and feed steps are repeated as long as paper is detected in the document feeder input tray. Duplex: When the product duplexes from the document feeder, the paper passes through the document feeder three times. During the second instance, the product reverses the page orientation and then scans it. During the third instance, the product returns the page to the original orientation. Lift: When no more paper is detected in the document feeder input tray and the form sensor detects the trailing edge of the last page, the last sheet is ejected and the motor lifts the pick-roller assembly to standby (paper-loading) mode again. The document feeder will not function when the document feeder cover is open. When the document feeder cover is closed, the cover-present sensor detects its presence. The paper path is incomplete if the scanner lid/document feeder is lifted from the glass, and it will result in a paper jam error. Document feeder paper path and sensors The following diagram shows the document feeder paper path during a duplexed copy job. The paper enters the product from the document feeder input tray and passes through the paper path for the first time. The product then pulls the paper back through the path to reorient the page and scan the second side. The paper then travels back to the end of the paper path, where it is pulled in again to be reoriented and ejected into the output bin. ENWW Document feeder (X585 models) 33 Figure 1-20 Document feeder paper path and sensors Prepick roller Document flag Separation roller Stack Shop shop (1) Input tray (1) (1) (2) Flag TOP (1.2) Paper pulled back after first side scan (1.2) Prepick roller Output roller Output tray (1.2) Paper travel direction Scan glass The paper-present sensor determines if paper is in the document feeder input tray. The form sensor detects the top and bottom edges of the document. Another sensor detects an open document feeder cover. Document feeder jam detection The document feeder has two sensors that detect paper. The paper-present sensor detects the presence of media in the document feeder input tray. The form sensor detects media moving through the document feeder. If a jam is detected, the document feeder immediately stops the paper feeding and initiates a jam clearing routine. A jam message appears on the control-panel display. A jam can be detected under any of the following conditions: 34 ● Document-feeder jam:When documents are detected in the document feeder input tray, and a command to copy, scan or fax is received, the document feeder attempts three times, or for about 10 seconds, to advance the paper to the form sensor. If the paper does not advance, the scan module turns off and the ADF Misfeed message appears on the control-panel display. ● Long-document jam: If the paper has advanced to trigger the form sensor, but the trailing edge is not detected within the time allowed for a 381 mm (15 in) document (the maximum allowable page length for the document feeder), the scan module turns off and the message Paper Jam appears on the control-panel display. ● Stall jam: When a page that is less than 381 mm (15 in) long has advanced to the form sensor but has not left it within the expected time, the paper has probably stalled or jammed. The scan module turns off and the message Paper Jam appears on the control-panel display. ● Other: If the paper stops in the document feeder and the scan module remains under the document feeder scanner glass, an internal firmware error has probably occurred and the message Cannot Scan, Copy, or Fax appears on the control-panel display. This is usually remedied by cycling the power. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Scanner system (X585 models) The flatbed image scanner captures an electronic image of the document on the glass. The scanner does this by illuminating the document with LEDs (red, green, and blue) and capturing the image in the image sensor to create an electronic image of the document. The flatbed scanner consists of three main elements ● CIS scanner. The CIS (contact image sensor) scanner captures an image using the product's optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the optical system captures each color in a single row of CCD sensors that cover the entire page width. Because only one color is captured for each line per exposure, the three colors are recombined electronically to create the full color image. For monochromatic scans or copies, all three LEDs are illuminated to create a white light for the scan so the raster line can be captured in one exposure. ● Mechanical carriage drive. The carriage drive moves the CIS scan head along the document length to create the image. In this product, a small DC motor with an optical encoder creates this motion. The speed of the carriage drive is proportional to the scan resolution (300 ppi is much faster than 1200 ppi) and also proportional to the type of scan (color scans are three times slower than monochromatic scans). A 1200 ppi color scan moves so slowly that the product might appear to not be working, whereas a monochromatic copy scan moves at 50 times that speed and will be somewhat noisy. ● Image processing system (formatter). The formatter processes the scanner data into either a copy or a scan to the computer. For copies, the image data is sent directly to the product without being transmitted to the computer. Depending on user selections for the copy settings, the formatter enhances the scanner data before sending it to the product. Image data is captured at 300 ppi for copies and is user selectable for scans to the computer. Each pixel is represented by 8 bits for each of the three colors (256 levels for each color), for a total of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color). Scanner power-on sequence of events When the product is turned on, it performs the following tests: ENWW ● Motor test. The product moves the motor left and right to confirm operation. It reports a scanner error 12 if no motion is detected in the motor encoder system. ● Wall find. The scan carriage moves slowly to the left while watching an encoder on the carriage motor to determine when the carriage has found the side wall or stop. This enables the product to identify the document origin (position of the original). If the document origin cannot be located, a default position is used instead. ● LED check. The product moves the carriage to the white calibration label under the left side of the flatbed image scanner, and it verifies that the minimum and maximum response is acceptable. It reports a scanner error 14 if the response is unacceptable. ● Home find. The scan carriage uses the optical scanner to find physical reference features that relate to the document origin at the left side of the image glass. This process ensures accurate location of the first document pixels so that the user documents will have an accurate placement of the image on scans and copies. It reports a scanner error 6 message if the reference features are not found. ● Calibration. This test, also known as scanner color calibration, enables the product to identify the black and white on every pixel in the CCD. Calibration occurs in two processes: a broad (analog) adjustment of all pixels to bring them into the target output range, and a pixel-by-pixel adjustment (digital) to fine tune the actual black and white response. The calibration process occurs under the left side of flatbed image scanner where there is a special white calibration label. The calibration code in the product firmware needs to be updated when the scanner assembly is replaced. Scanner system (X585 models) 35 Calibration is the most important step in creating a high quality image. Calibration problems can include color and brightness inaccuracies and vertical streaks through the image. The calibration process identifies any bad pixels and enables the image formatter to recreate the lost information from adjacent pixels. Extreme cases of this problem can appear as large vertical streaks or image smears. The user has no control over the calibration process itself or this pixel-replacement process. For best calibration results, make sure that the scanner lid is in the down (closed) position. Copy or scan-to-computer sequence of events To create an accurate rendition of a document, the scanner must be calibrated for the requested operation. If the user selects a scan at 600 ppi color, the flatbed image scanner calibrates for that specific operational mode. The flatbed image scanner automatically re-calibrates for the next requested operation. Calibration does not occur for every new copy request. This is the normal sequence of operation for a flatbed copy or scan. 36 1. LEDs illuminate. 2. Carriage motion begins moving the CIS scanner toward the right. 3. Image capture continues for the entire page or length requested in a scan-to-computer operation. 4. Carriage returns to the home position on the left. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fax functions and operation (X585 models) The following sections describe the product fax capabilities. Computer and network security features The product can send and receive fax data over telephone lines that conform to public switch telephone network (PSTN) standards. The secure fax protocols make it impossible for computer viruses to be transferred from the telephone line to a computer or network. The following product features prevent virus transmission: ● No direct connection exists between the fax line and any devices that are connected to the USB or Ethernet ports. ● The internal firmware cannot be modified through the fax connection. ● All fax communications go through the fax subsystem, which does not use Internet data-exchange protocols. PSTN operation The PSTN operates through a central office (CO) that generates a constant voltage on the TIP and RING wires (usually 48 V). A device goes off-hook by connecting impedance (such as 600 ohms for the U.S.) across the TIP and RING so that a line current can flow. The CO can detect this current and send impulses like dial tones. The product generates more signaling tones, such as dialing digits, to tell the CO how to connect the call. The product can also detect tones, such as a busy tone from the CO, that tell it how to behave. When the call is connected, the CO behaves like a wire connecting the sender and receiver. This is the period during which all of the fax signaling and data transfer occurs. When a call is completed, the circuit opens again and the line-current flow ceases, removing the CO connection from both the sender and the receiver. On most phone systems, the TIP and RING signals appear on pins 3 and 4 of the RJ-11 modular jack (the one on the fax card, as defined in the common six-wire RJ standard). These two signals do not have to be polarized because all of the equipment works with either TIP or RING on one pin and the other signal on the other pin. This means that cables of either polarity can interconnect and still work. These basic functions of PSTN operation are assumed in the design of the fax subsystem. The product generates and detects the signaling tones, currents, and data signals that are required to transmit and receive faxes using the PSTN. The fax subsystem The formatter, fax card, firmware, and software all contribute to the product fax functionality. The designs of the formatter and fax card, along with parameters in the firmware, determine the majority of the regulatory requirements for telephony on the product. The fax subsystem is designed to support V.34 fax transmission, medium speeds (such as V.17 fax), and the lower speeds of older fax machines. Fax card in the fax subsystem The fax card contains the modem chipset (DSP and CODEC) that controls the basic fax functions of tone generation and detection, along with channel control for fax transmissions. The CODEC and its associated circuitry act as the third-generation silicon data access arrangement (DAA) to comply with worldwide regulatory requirements. ENWW Fax functions and operation (X585 models) 37 Safety isolation The fax card provides safety isolation between the high-voltage, transient-prone environment of the telephone network (TNV [telephone network voltage]) and the low-voltage analog and digital circuitry of the formatter (SELV [secondary extra-low voltage]). This safety isolation provides both customer safety and product reliability in the telecom environment. Any signals that cross the isolation barrier do so magnetically. The breakdown voltage rating of barriercritical components is greater than 5 kV. Safety-protection circuitry In addition to the safety barrier, the fax card protects against over-voltage and over-current events. Telephone over-voltage events can be either differential mode or common mode. The event can be transient in nature (a lightning-induced surge or ESD) or continuous (a power line crossed with a phone line). The fax card protection circuitry provides a margin of safety against combinations of over-voltage and over-current events. Common mode protection is provided by the selection of high-voltage-barrier critical components (transformer and relay). The safety barrier of the fax card PCA and the clearance between the fax card and surrounding components also contribute to common mode protection. A voltage suppressor (a crowbar-type thyristor) provides differential protection. This device becomes low impedance at approximately 300 V differential, and crowbars to a low voltage. Data path TIP and RING are the two-wire paths for all signals from the telephone network. All signaling and data information comes across them, including fax tones and fax data. The telephone network uses DC current to determine the hook state of the telephone, so line current must be present during a call. The silicon DAA provides a DC holding circuit to keep the line current constant during a fax call. The silicon DAA converts the analog signal to a digital signal for DSP processing, and also converts the digital signal to an analog signal for transmitting data through a telephone line. The magnetically coupled signals that cross the isolation barrier go through a transformer. The DSP in the fax card communicates with the ASIC in the formatter using the high-speed serial interface. Ring detect Ring detect is performed by the line voltage monitoring module of the silicon DAA, and is a combination of voltage levels and cadence (time on and time off). Both must be present to detect a valid ring. The CODEC works with DSP and the firmware to determine if an incoming signal is an answerable ring. Line current control The DC current from the CO needs to have a path to flow from TIP to RING. The DC impedance emulation line modulator and DC terminations modules in the silicon DAA act as a DC holding circuit, and work with the firmware to achieve the voltage-current characteristic between TIP and RING. The impedance (the currentvoltage characteristic) changes corresponding to certain special events, such as pulse dialing or when the product goes on-hook. 38 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fax page storage in flash memory Fax pages are the electronic images of the document page. They can be created in any of three ways: scanned to be sent to another fax machine, generated to be sent by the computer, or received from a fax machine to be printed. The product automatically stores all fax pages in flash memory. After these pages are written into flash memory, they are stored until the pages are sent to another fax machine, printed on the product, transmitted to the computer, or erased by the user. These pages are stored in flash memory, which is the nonvolatile memory that can be repeatedly read from, written to, and erased. The product has 2 MB of flash memory, of which 1.5 MB is available for fax storage. The remaining 0.5 MB is used for the file system and reclamation. Adding RAM does not affect the fax page storage because the product does not use RAM for storing fax pages. Advantages of flash memory storage Fax pages that are stored in flash memory are persistent. They are not lost as a result of a power failure, no matter how long the power is off. Users can reprint faxes if an ink cartridge runs out of ink or the product experiences other errors while printing. The product also has scan-ahead functionality that makes use of flash memory. Scan-ahead automatically scans pages into flash memory before a fax job is sent. This allows the sender to pick up the original document immediately after it is scanned, eliminating the need to wait until the fax transmission is complete. Because fax pages are stored in flash memory rather than RAM, more RAM is available to handle larger and more complicated copy and print jobs. ENWW Fax functions and operation (X585 models) 39 40 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 2 ENWW Solve problems ● Problem-solving checklist ● Troubleshooting process ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Control-panel menus ● Solve image quality problems ● Solve paper jam or feed problems ● Solve performance problems ● Solve connectivity problems ● Service mode functions ● Solve fax problems ● Product upgrades 41 Problem-solving checklist Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product. ● Step 1: Check that the product power is on ● Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages ● Step 3: Test print functionality ● Step 4: Test copy functionality ● Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality ● Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality ● Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer ● Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality ● Factors that affect product performance Step 1: Check that the product power is on 1. Make sure that the product is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a green light. If it is not, press the power button. It should first glow with an amber color, and then quickly switch to green as the product initializes. If the power button does not light up, check the following conditions. ● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the product and the outlet. ● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet. 2. If the product motors do not rotate, make sure that the ink cartridges are installed and that the doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems. 3. If the document feeder motor does not rotate, open the document feeder cover and remove any packing material or shipping tape. 4. If the scanner bulb does not light during copying, scanning, or faxing, contact HP support. Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error. Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life. ● Ink collection unit (B5L09A): estimated life is 115,000 pages. ● Document feeder (ADF) roller kit, X585 models only (L2718A): estimated life is 100,000 pages. NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual life or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated life is not an implied warranty. 42 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Step 3: Test print functionality 1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Administration button. 2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration Page item, and then touch the Print button to print the report. 3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to see if paper is jammed inside the product. NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this product. Step 4: Test copy functionality 1. Place the configuration page into the document feeder and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly through the document feeder, you might need to clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the paper meets specifications for this product. 2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy. 3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small glass strip. Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality 1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Administration button. 2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Fax Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button to test the fax functionality. 3. Touch the Fax on the product control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button. Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality 1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Administration button. 2. Touch the Fax Setup menu, and then touch the Fax Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button to test the fax functionality. 3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the product. 4. Review and reset the product fax settings. Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer ENWW 1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the product. 2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver. 3. Uninstall and then reinstall the product software. Problem-solving checklist 43 Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality 1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the slot on the front of the product. 2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo. 3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive. Factors that affect product performance Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job: 44 ● The software program that you are using and its settings ● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper) ● Product processing and download time ● The complexity and size of graphics ● The speed of the computer you are using ● The USB or network connection ● Whether the product is printing in color or in monochrome ● The type of USB drive, if you are using one ● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting process Determine the problem source When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems. ● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: ● Are supply items within their rated life? ● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies? ● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors? NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition. Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems. Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart. Table 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Power on Is the product on and does a readable message display? Yes 2 Control-panel messages 3 Event log No Does the message Ready display on the control panel? Yes After the control-panel display is functional, see step 2. After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3. See Error messages on page 60. No Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this product. Does the event log print? Yes Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power subsystem on page 46. No If the event log does not print, check for error messages. See Error messages on page 60. If paper jams inside the product, clear the jam. See Clear jams on page 238. If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see the control-panel message section of the service manual. After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see step 4. ENWW Troubleshooting process 45 Table 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued) 4 Open the Reports menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all the accessories are installed. Information pages Are all the accessories installed? Yes 5 Yes 6 Interface After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5. No Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements? Print quality If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it. No Compare the images with the print quality report. See Interpret the print quality report on page 156. After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the host computer? Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process. If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see the control-panel message section of the service manual. No When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process. Power subsystem Power-on checks The basic product functions should start up when the product is connected into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem. If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem. Power-on troubleshooting overview During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on. Place your hand over the vents at the rear of the product, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the scanner (X585 models). If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the product. You can lean close to the product and hear the fan operating. After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on. If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items: 46 1. Make sure that the product is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that delivers the correct voltage. 2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position. 3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational. 4. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 5. Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, make sure the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking. 6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the product on again. Scanning subsystem (X585) Calibrate the scanner Use this procedure to properly position the copied image on the page. TIP: This adjustment might be required after the scanner or document feeder is replaced. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Touch the Calibration/Cleaning button. 3. Touch the Calibrate Scanner button, and then follow the instructions provided on the screen. Control panel checks The product includes a diagnostic test mode for the control panel. This mode allows you to troubleshoot issues with the touchscreen, the speaker, and the Home button. NOTE: Some of the diagnostic tests are for factory use only. TIP: To diagnose control panel problems, see Control panel diagnostic flowcharts on page 50. Open diagnostic mode ● Tilt the control panel forward. On the back side of the control panel, press the button that is underneath the round black rubber cover near the center of the control panel to access the diagnostic mode. Repeatedly pressing the button will scroll through additional screens on the control-panel display. Continue to press the button to scroll back to the diagnostic-mode main test screen. Exit diagnostic mode Do one of the following: ● Touch the Cancel ● Wait 20 seconds. The control panel will return to the Home screen. button. Table 2-2 Control panel diagnostic functions Item Description Remarks Exits a test Cancel button ENWW Troubleshooting process 47 Table 2-2 Control panel diagnostic functions (continued) Item Description Remarks Selects test settings in some of the test windows Keypad Verifies that all areas respond to a touch Use this item to check the accuracy of the touch screen. Use a finger or 3 mm (.118 in) conductive stylus to trace between the grid lines to check the accuracy of the touchscreen calibration. NOTE: The gap between the grid lines is 6 mm (. 236 in). Red-grid touch test When the screen is touched, a line or a dot displays on the screen (the X and Y coordinates of the position on the screen are also displayed). Checks calibration Use this item to determine if the touchscreen calibration is within the acceptable range. When selected, ten target points (and the X and Y coordinates of the position of the target point) display on the screen. Touching a target causes the X and Y coordinate of that target to appear in the middle of the touchscreen (above the cancel button). Calibration touch test NOTE: The product automatically calibrates the touchscreen. A manual touchscreen calibration procedure is not available for this product. Selects a test pattern to view on the display. Use this item to identify touchscreen LED display problems. 1. Touch the icon. 2. Touch the up or down arrow buttons to scroll though touchscreen LED display test screens. Touchscreen LED display test Tests sounds Use this item to test audio functionality. 1. Touching this item causes the speaker to emit a tone. 2. Touch the 2 button on the keypad, and then touch this item to cause the speaker to emit a more complex tone. Speaker test 48 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-2 Control panel diagnostic functions (continued) Item Description Remarks Shows the firmware version Touch this item to display the control panel firmware version and firmware build date. Firmware information Factory use only Tests the product keyboard NOTE: For products with a keyboard feature only. Keyboard test Adjusts the backlight When this item is selected, pressing a button on the keyboard causes the corresponding character to appear on the control-panel display. 1. Touch the icon. 2. Press a button on the keyboard. The corresponding character should appear on the control-panel display. Use this item to adjust the brightness of the control-panel display. 1. Touch the icon. 2. Touch the up or down arrow buttons to adjust the backlight level. Backlight test Checks the ambient light sensor Ambient-light sensor test Tests the Home Home button test ENWW button Use this item to test the ambient-light sensor functionality. 1. Touch the icon. 2. Shine a flashlight at the control panel to the left of, and down about 25.4 mm (1 in,) from button. the Home 3. The numbers displayed below the icon should be any value other than zero. Use this item to test the Home switch functionality. button LED and 1. Touch the icon. 2. Press the Home button on the right side of the control panel. The LED icon on the controlpanel display illuminates if the button LED and switch are correctly functioning. Troubleshooting process 49 Control panel diagnostic flowcharts TIP: Tilt the control panel forward. On the back side of the control panel, press the button that is underneath the round black rubber cover near the center of the control panel to access the diagnostic mode. Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems. 50 ● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image). ● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond. ● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone. ● No control panel sound. ● Home ● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional). button is unresponsive. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) Figure 2-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) Black display (no backlight or image) Is the Home button illuminated (bright white)? Dim display (no image) White display (no image) Y Is the product in bright sunlight? If yes, move the product to a different location. Open the diagnostic function. N Touch the display or Home button to exit sleep mode. Make sure that the product is plugged in and the power is turned on. Does an image appear on the control panel? Y Open the diagnostic function. Perform the backlight test. N Y Does the display turn on? Problem solved. N Are the formatter LEDs functioning? Y Turn the product power off. Inspect and reseat the control panel cables. Remove and reseat the formatter. Make sure that the formatter LEDs function. Problem fixed? N Turn the product power off. Remove and reseat the formatter. Troubleshoot the formatter. Do not replace the control panel. N Is the backlight adjustable? Y Y Do not replace the control panel. Turn the product power off. Remove and reseat the formatter. If the error persists, troubleshoot the formatter, USB cable, and the control panel. N Replace the control panel. ENWW Troubleshooting process 51 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond TIP: Use the red-grid touch test to verify that all areas of the touchscreen are correctly functioning. See Table 2-2 Control panel diagnostic functions on page 47. Figure 2-2 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond Touchscreen slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond Not a control-panel problem. Do not replace the control panel. Troubleshoot firmware or software application problems. 52 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Figure 2-3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Is the area of the touchscreen you are touching greyed out (intentionally deactivated)? N Open the diagnostic function. Perform the red-grid touch test. Does the previously inactive area respond to a touch? N Y Turn the product power off, and then on again. Y Replace the control panel. N Does the previously inactive area respond to a touch? Y Do not replace the control panel. ENWW Troubleshooting process 53 No control panel sound Figure 2-4 No control panel sound Control panel has no sound Open the following menus: Administration Display Settings Key Press Sound Select the following: On Save Can sounds be heard? N Y Open the diagnostic function. Perform the sound test. Can sounds be heard? Y N Do not replace the control panel. Replace the control panel. 54 Chapter 2 Solve problems N Turn the product power off. Remove the control panel. Check the cables to the speaker. Reseat the cables to the speaker. Turn the product power on. Can sounds be heard? ENWW Home button is unresponsive Figure 2-5 Home button is unresponsive Home button unresponsive Open the diagnostic function. Perform the Home button test. Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed? N Turn the product power off, and then on again. Y Open the diagnostic function. Perform the Home button test. Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed? Y N Replace the control panel. ENWW Do not replace the control panel. Troubleshooting process 55 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) Figure 2-6 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) Hardware integration pocket (HIP) not functional (control panel functional) Check that all installed hardware integration pocket devices are within HP specifications. The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to the port. If an installed device attempts to draw more power than is provided, the port is automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party devices with the device manufacturer. 56 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Tools for troubleshooting Print the configuration page Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you print a configuration page. In addition to the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print. Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and product languages. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages 3. Touch Configuration Page to select it. 4. Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to print the pages. Figure 2-7 Configuration page 1 4 5 6 2 7 8 3 ENWW 1 Device Information information, including the firmware version, usage statistics, and the service ID. 2 Installed Personalities and Options information, including installed printer languages and hard disk information. 3 HP Web Services status information Tools for troubleshooting 57 4 Calibration Information that shows when the product most recently performed a calibration. 5 Memory 6 Event Log information that shows the most recent entries in the log. 7 Security information that includes encryption information and current security settings. 8 Paper Trays and Options information that shows installed trays and current paper size/type settings. HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information. Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates: I/O Card Ready. Figure 2-8 HP embedded Jetdirect page 1 4 5 2 6 3 58 1 General Information indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date. 2 Security Settings information 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions. 4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address 5 IPv4 information 6 IPv6 information Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Finding important information on the configuration pages Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages. Table 2-3 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information Specific information Configuration page Firmware date codes Engine firmware revision When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded. Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” HP embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the HP embedded Jetdirect page, under “General Information.” Accessories and internal storage Embedded HP Jetdirect All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page. Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and ID. Total RAM Look on the main configuration page, under “Memory.” Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Finishing accessories Installed finishing accessory type Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Engine cycles and event logs Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Event log information Look on the main configuration page, under “Event Log.” In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory. These pages list more detailed information for those devices. Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance. The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the Troubleshooting menu. Event log information Event log messages See the control-panel message and event-log entries section of the product reoubleshooting manual for eventl-log entry descriptions and solutions. Print or view an event log NOTE: The event log in the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. For a complete event log, use the Service menu. Print or view the event log from the Administration menu ENWW 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: Tools for troubleshooting 59 3. ● Troubleshooting ● Event Log The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button. Print or view the event log from the Device Maintenance menu 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Open the Service menu. 3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list. 4. Enter one of the following service access code for your product: ● X555: 04055514 ● X585: 04058514 5. Touch the Event Log item. 6. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button. Clear an event log 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Open the Service menu. 3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list. 4. Enter one of the following service access code for your product: 5. ● X555: 04055514 ● X585: 04058514 Select the Clear Event Log item, and then touch the OK button. Error messages The following control-panel messages and software error messages, which appear on the user's computer screen, indicate the current product status or situations that might require action. 11.XX.YZ Error Messages 11.00.01 or 11.00.02 Internal clock error Description This message indicates a problem with the formatter's real time clock. The product real time clock has experienced an error. 01=dead clock 02=dead real time clock 60 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again, set the time and date on the control panel. 2. If the error persists, you might need to replace the formatter. 15.XX.YZ Error Messages 15.00.00 Unknown Jam Description A paper jam has occurred in the printer at an unknown location. Recommended action 1. Follow jam removal instructions on the screen. 2. Open all doors and trays and remove all paper from the paper path. 3. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 15.A0.01 Input Jam, Tray 1 Description An input jam occurred from Tray 1 but sensor and condition are unknown. No Pick "Did not pick page from tray 1”. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Feed roller REDI sensor [1] for Tray 1 in designated amount of time after the start of paper pick-up from Tray 1. Recommended action 1. Follow jam removal instructions on the screen. 2. Clear all possible paper jam locations (remove paper stack, open left door, remove ICU, lower flap, clear paper, raise flap, install ICU, close door ). 3. Verify the paper meets the specifications for the tray. 4. Ensure that the tray width setting is set to your paper being installed into the tray. The arrow on the guide should line up exactly with the line connected to paper size designation. ENWW 5. Make sure the tray is not overload above the marking shown on the tray side guide. 6. Check the Tray 1 feed roller for wear, damage or paper dusk. Clean or replace the rollers as needed. 7. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 8. Replace the Mech Kit. Tools for troubleshooting 61 15.A0.02 Input Jam, Tray 2 Description An input jam occurred from Tray 2 but sensor and condition are unknown. No Pick "Did not pick page from tray 2”. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Feed roller REDI sensor [1] for Tray 2 in designated amount of time after the start of paper pick-up from Tray 2. Recommended action 1. Follow jam removal instructions on the screen. 2. Clear all possible paper jam locations (Open paper cassette remove paper, open left door, remove ICU, lower flap, clear paper, raise flap, install ICU, close door). 3. Verify the paper meets the specifications for the tray. 4. Ensure that the tray width setting is set to your paper being installed into the tray. The arrow on the guide should line up exactly with the line connected to paper size designation. 5. Make sure the tray is not overload above the marking shown on the tray side guide. 6. Check the Tray 2 pickup and feed rollers for wear, damage or paper dusk. Clean or replace the rollers as needed. 7. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 8. Replace the Mech Kit. 15.A0.03 Input Jam, Tray 3 Description An input jam occurred from Tray 3 but sensor and condition are unknown. No Pick "Did not pick page from tray 3”. This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the Tray 3 separation REDI sensor in designated amount of time after the start of paper pick-up from Tray 3. Recommended action 1. Follow jam removal instructions on the screen. 2. Clear all possible paper jam locations (Open paper cassette remove paper, open left door, remove ICU, lower flap, clear paper, raise flap, install ICU, close door ). 3. Verify the paper meets the specifications for the tray. 4. Ensure that the tray width setting is set to your paper being installed into the tray. The arrow on the guide should line up exactly with the line connected to paper size designation. 5. 62 Make sure the tray is not overload above the marking shown on the tray side guide. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 6. Check the Tray 3 pickup and feed rollers for wear, damage or paper dusk. Clean or replace the rollers as needed. 7. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 8. Replace the Mech Kit. 15.B0.0Z Image Area Jam from Tray X Description A Print Zone jam occurred from tray indicated but sensor and condition are unknown. ● 15.B0.01 — Image Area from Tray 1 ● 15.B0.02 — Image Area from Tray 2 ● 15.B0.03 — Image Area from Tray 3 ● 15.B0.0D — Image Area from Duplexer Recommended action 1. Clear all possible paper jam locations (Remove paper from tray, open left door, remove ICU, lower flap, clear paper, raise flap, install ICU, close door ). 2. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 3. Replace Mech Kit. 15.C0.0Z Switchback area Jam from Tray X Description An output jam occurred while printing from indicated tray or area. ● 15.C0.01 — Switchback jam from Tray 1 ● 15.C0.02 — Switchback jam from Tray 2 ● 15.C0.03 — Switchback from Tray 3 ● 15.C0.0D — Switchback from Duplexer Recommended action 1. Clear all possible paper jam locations (Open left door, remove ICU, lower flap, clear paper, raise flap, install ICU, close door ). 2. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 3. Replace Mech Kit. 15.E0.0Z Output jam from Tray X Description An eject jam occurred from the tray designated. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 63 ● 15.E0.01 — Output jam from Tray 1 ● 15.E0.02 — Output jam from Tray 2 ● 15.E0.03 — Output jam from Tray 3 ● 15.E0.0D — Output jam from Duplexer Recommended action 1. Clear all possible paper jam locations (Open left door, remove ICU, lower flap, clear paper, raise flap, install ICU, close door ). 2. Run Paper Path Diagnostics to move paper from tray to output bin (Administration / Troubleshooting / Paper Path Page). 3. Replace Mech Kit. 17.XX.YZ Error Messages (Supply errors) 17.0X.00 Failed Cartridge Description The indicated cartridge is detected but its data is corrupt or invalid in some way. ● 17.00.00 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.00 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.00 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.00 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action 1. Remove the cartridge, reinstall it and close the ink door. 2. Turn the product off, and then on again. 3. Replace the failing cartridge. 4. Replace the Mech Kit. 17.0X.34 Counterfeit or refilled cartridge installed Description The supply being used is either a counterfeit or refilled cartridge. ● 17.00.34 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.34 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.34 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.34 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action To avoid this condition – always use genuine HP cartridges. 64 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW The user must replace with a genuine HP cartridge OR approve the use of refilled cartridges before printing can continue. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. Any print quality repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty. Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available. 17.0X.35 IncompatibleDescription The indicated supply is not compatible with this product. ● 17.00.35 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.35 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.35 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.35 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action To avoid this condition – always use genuine HP cartridges. The user must replace with a genuine HP cartridge OR approve the use of refilled cartridges before printing can continue. 17.0X.36 Non-Startup cartridge at startup Description Non-Startup cartridge at startup. A trade cartridge has been installed before purge has been completed. ● 17.00.36 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.36 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.36 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.36 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action To avoid this condition – always use the startup cartridges that shipped with the product. Do not override and use trade cartridges unless absolutely necessary. If the user later finds the startup cartridges after initialization, these startup cartridges will be unusable on this device. 17.0X.37 Startup Cartridge after startup completed Description Startup cartridge is being used after startup completed. ENWW ● 17.00.37 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.37 — Cyan Cartridge Tools for troubleshooting 65 ● 17.02.37 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.37 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action To avoid this condition, always use trade cartridges after initialization has completed and the original startup cartridges are spent. Startup cartridges can only be used the first time the product is initialized. Once a startup cartridge has been used for initialization it’s memory tag contents are changed to indicate it will now behave and be detected as a trade cartridge. 17.0X.38 Cartridge might be empty Description The cartridge indicated might be empty. Continuing may cause image quality issues. This is a transient condition that occurs when the cartridge memory tag indicates empty and the cartridge is newly inserted into a printer. ● 17.00.38 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.38 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.38 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.38 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action There several possible outcomes when this condition is detected: 1. The user removes the cartridge from the printer and replaces it with a non-empty cartridge. 2. The user touches “OK” and approves the use of the “Possibly Empty” cartridge. ● Printer attempts to pump/prime ink but is unsuccessful. The cartridge is declared as “Empty”. ● Some ink was previously stranded due to tilt and the pump/prime is successful. The cartridge is declared as “Low” or possibly “Very Low”. ● Cartridge has been refilled and now after printing some number of pages, the cartridge will be declared as “Refilled”. 17.0X.39 Use new cartridges Description The Startup-Trade cartridge override feature has been enabled and a partially used Cyan Cartridge has been installed before the ink initialization process completed. The cartridge might not be able to complete the ink initialization. Using a new cartridge allows the process to complete in one session, preventing the user from leaving and coming back to find the process incomplete. 66 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ● 17.00.39 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.39 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.39 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.39 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action Touch “OK” to continue or use a new cartridge. If a “Too Low to Prime” condition occurs, use the following steps. 1. The engine has determined that there is probably not enough ink in the installed trade cartridge to complete the initialization (ink purge) process. 2. The user can touch “OK” to proceed anyway (they may see this same message again once the current cartridge is depleted). 3. The user can replace the partially full trade cartridge with a replacement that is full. 17.0X.42 General printing error Description Printer failure or the indicated cartridge SHAID too early. ● 17.00.42 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.42 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.42 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.42 — Yellow Cartridge NOTE: Condition does not distinguish between SHAID Too Early and a failure in the ink delivery system. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Replace the cartridge. 3. Replace the Mech kit. 17.0X.52 Supply upgrade detected Description The indicated supply upgrade was detected. ENWW ● 17.00.52 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.52 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.52 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.52 — Yellow Cartridge Tools for troubleshooting 67 Recommended action Touch “OK” to continue or change cartridge. 17.0X.53 Supply upgrade successful Description The indicated supply upgrade was successful. ● 17.00.53 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.53 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.53 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.53 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action No action necessary. 17.0X.54 Supply upgrade problem Description The indicated supply encountered an upgrade problem. The requested upgrade (addition of a new cartridge to the list of supported cartridges stored in the engine NVRAM) using a “Trade” cartridge did not succeed. The formatter does not know why the failure occurred, only that it did fail. ● 17.00.54 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.54 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.54 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.54 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action 1. Replace the failed cartridge with one that is known good and then reinsert the upgrade cartridge and try again. 2. Turn the product off, and then on again. 3. Remove the upgrade cartridge and go back to using the cartridge(s) supported at release. 4. Replace the Mech Kit. 17.0X.55 Supply upgrade problem Description The indicated supply encountered an upgrade problem. The requested upgrade (addition of a new cartridge to the list of supported cartridges stored in the engine NVRAM) using a “Startup” cartridge did not succeed. The formatter does not know why the failure occurred, only that it did fail. 68 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ● 17.00.55 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.55 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.55 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.55 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action 1. Replace the failed cartridge with one that is known good and then reinsert the upgrade cartridge and try again. 2. Turn the product off, and then on again. 3. Remove the upgrade cartridge and go back to using the cartridge(s) supported at release. 4. Replace the Mech Kit. 17.0X.56 Ink sensor warning Description The indicated cartridge has printed past approximately 150% of its expected capacity and there has been no SHAID event. The ink sensor might not be able to detect when supplies are empty or the cartridge has been refilled. ● 17.00.56 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.56 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.56 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.56 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action 1. If print quality issues exist, replace the cartridge. 2. Check cartridge warranty and manufacture date. Check event log for low on ink code. If user acknowledges, assume cartridge has been refilled. 17.0X.57 HP Cartridge Protection enabled Description The indicated cartridge that has been protected using the HP cartridge protection feature has been detected. The target cartridge has been locked to a different printer and cannot be used on this device. ENWW ● 17.00.57 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.57 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.57 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.57 — Yellow Cartridge Tools for troubleshooting 69 Recommended action 1. Replace the indicated cartridge with one that has not been “protected” on another device. 2. Once a cartridge is locked to a given device there is no way to unlock the cartridge. 17.0X.60 Cartridge Low Warning Description The indicated cartridge is low. ● 17.00.60 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.60 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.60 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.60 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action No action necessary. 17.0X.65 Install Supply Description The indicated cartridge is not installed or missing or has a damaged acumen. ● 17.00.65 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.65 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.65 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.65 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action 1. Reinstall the supply. 2. Replace the indicated supply with a replacement. 17.0X.69 Cartridge Very Low Description The indicated cartridge is very low. 70 ● 17.00.69 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.69 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.69 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.69 — Yellow Cartridge Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action The target cartridge has been depleted and the only ink remaining is in the X chamber and print head. The cartridge can be replaced in this state without any loss of ink to the system. No action necessary. 17.0X.70 Printing past very low Description The indicated cartridge is printing past very low. ● 17.00.70 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.70 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.70 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.70 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action The print quality should not degrade in any way when the ink cartridge approaches end-of-life as the product will halt printing when all of the usable ink has been depleted. Customers should have a spare cartridge on-hand as the indicated cartridge will transition to Empty in just a few pages. If print quality is not acceptable replace the indicated cartridge. 17.0X.80 Install Supply Description The indicated cartridge is missing. ● 17.00.80 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.80 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.80 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.80 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action Install the indicated cartridge. 17.31.60 Ink Collection Unit Warning Description Ink Collection Unit almost full. The percentage of life remaining is 2%. The product’s Ink Collection Unit (ICU) collects unused ink for later disposal. The life tracking on this supply is accomplished via a numeric percent life remaining (PLR) that starts at 100% and decreases in 1% increments as pages are printed. The engine counts the number of ink droplet that go into the ICU and reports this information to the formatter as a percentage of life remaining. The expected life of the ICU is nominally 120,000 page but this will vary depending on printing patterns. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 71 Recommended action A new ICU should be ordered and printing can continue. NOTE: There is no sensor that indicates when the ICU has been replaced. For this reason the user will be asked near end of ICU life if the ICU has been replaced each time the left door closes or a power-on occurs. 17.31.65 Install Supply Ink Collection Unit Description The Ink Collection Unit (ICU) is not installed. Recommended action Install the ICU, make sure it is aligned and installed correctly. If message continues to appear, install a replacement ICU. 17.31.69 Ink Collection Unit full Description The Ink Collection Unit is full. This is the second warning that the ICU life is almost depleted. The percentage of life remaining is 1% or less. The products Ink Collection Unit (ICU) collects unused ink for later disposal. The life tracking on this supply is accomplished via a numeric percent life remaining (PLR) that starts at 100% and decreases in 1% increments as pages are printed. The engine counts the number of ink droplet that go into the ICU and reports this information to the formatter as a percentage of life remaining. The expected life of the ICU is nominally 120,000 page but this will vary depending on printing patterns. Recommended action Replace the ICU or continue printing until stop occurs. 17.31.70 Ink Collection Printing past full Description Ink Collection Unit (ICU) printing past full. Recommended action Replace the ICU. Replacement can occur at this point or the user can continue until halted. 17.31.71 Reinstall Ink Collection Unit Description The product has prompted the user to remove and reinstall the Ink Collection Unit (ICU) to maintain print quality. Recommended action Remove and reinstall ICU, make sure it is aligned and installed correctly. 72 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 17.31.72 Ink Collection Unit reinstalled Description The user removed and reinstalled the Ink Collection Unit (ICU) to maintain print quality. Recommended action No action necessary. 17.31.73 New Ink Collection Unit Description The Ink Collection Unit (ICU) counter has been reset. Recommended action There is no sensor that indicates when the ICU has been replaced. For this reason the user will be asked near end of ICU life if the ICU has been replaced each time the left door closes or a power-on occurs. When “YES” is selected the reset will be performed. 17.31.80 Replace Ink Collection Unit Description Ink Collection Unit (ICU) is full and must be replaced. Recommended action Replace the ICU. 17.99.31 Non-HP supply in use Description Non-HP supply in use. If any of these bits are set, the event could be posted. This message does not distinguish between supplies. Recommended action No action necessary. 17.99.32 Previously used HP Supply installed Description An original HP supply that started its life in another product is in use. This message does not distinguish between supplies. Recommended action No action necessary. 17.99.40 Supplies installed Description Transition of at least one non-HP to all genuine. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 73 This message does not distinguish between supplies. Recommended action No action necessary. 17.99.49 Startup Cartridge Override Description User has overridden using Startup cartridges. This message does not distinguish between supplies. Recommended action No action necessary. 17.99.58 HP Cartridge Protection enabled Description A user enabled the HP Cartridge Protection Feature, protecting their cartridges and restricting the cartridges to only be usable in the product that originally protected them. Recommended action No action necessary. 20.XX.YZ, 21.XX.YZ Error Messages 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: Description Event log error message 20.00.00. The product does not have enough memory to print the page. The product received more data than can fit in the available memory. You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or complex graphics. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred data. Some data might be lost. Reduce the page complexity or add product memory. 21.00.00 Page Too Complex Description Event log error message 21.00.00. The product displays this message to indicate that the page decompression process was too slow for the product. Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue. There may be some data loss on the page that was being formatted when the error occurred. 74 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 21.1C.2D Page complex error Description Event log error message 21.1C.2D. The product displays this message to indicate that the page decompression process was too slow for the product. Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue. There may be some data loss on the page that was being formatted when the error occurred. 30.XX.YZ Error Messages — X585 only 30.01.01 Description The flatbed cover sensor was interrupted. The scanner flatbed cover is open. Message appears only in the event log and is not posted on the control panel. The control panel will read Flatbed Cover Open. Recommended action No action necessary. This error message should automatically clear. If the error persists, open the Scanner Tests to test the flatbed cover sensor. 1. If the cover is closed, check the cover sensor at the right rear of the scanner for correct mechanical functionality, using the scanner sensor test in the Administration / Troubleshooting / Diagnostics / Scanner Tests Menu. 2. Check the connectors on the scanner control board (SCB) for loose connections. 3. Replace the lid-sensor assembly. 4. Replace the scanner control board (SCB). 5. Replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA). 30.01.02 Scanner calibration failure Description The scanner calibration failed. Recommended action ENWW 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. After the product warms up, repeat the calibration process. 3. If the error persists, replace the Integrated Scanning Assembly (ISA). Tools for troubleshooting 75 30.01.06 Scanner Fan failure Description Scanner fan error. The Copy, Fax and Send options will be grayed out or not present on the control panel and message will be posted in event log. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. During the product initialization sequence, listen to the fan to determine if it is operating. 3. the error persists, turn the product off and then check the fan wire-harness connectors. 4. If the error persists, replace the scanner control board (SCB). 5. Replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA). 30.01.08 Home position error Description The scanner optic failed to return to the home position. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Observe the movement of the optics assembly. 3. If the error persists, run the scanner motor test under component test. Administration/ Troubleshooting/Scanner tests/Flatbed motor test 4. If issue still remains and firmware has been upgraded replace scanner control board (SCB). 5. If the error persists, replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA). 30.01.14 Scan system EEPROM error Description Scanner control board (SCB) EEPROM error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Ensure all connectors on the SCB are connected and properly seated. 3. Ensure the MFP has at latest SCB firmware version. 4. Replace the SCB. 30.01.15 Scanner error Description Scanner did not initialize (internal error). 76 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW The scanner failed to be initialized due to an internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Verify that all covers are installed correctly and that the ADF and ADF jam cover are closed. 3. Check all sensors on the scanner to ensure they are not blocked. 4. Look through the vents on back of scanner check to see if GREEN SCB LEDs are lit. 5. Check all connections for SCB to print engine and make sure the are properly seated. 6. Replace the SCB. 30.01.18 Scanner Error Description Scanner internal optical sensor error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Make sure that all the connectors on the SCB are properly seated. 3. Make sure that the MFP has the latest SCB firmware version. 4. Replace the SCB. 5. If the error persists, replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA) 30.01.19 Scanner lamp error Description Scanner internal lamp sensor error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Determine if the scanner lamp turns on and off approximately 12 second after the product turns on. 3. Test the lower lamp using the scanner test located in the Diagnostics menu. 4. Re-seat the interconnect cables between the optical carriage and the SCB. 5. Replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA) 30.01.30 or 30.01.32 Description HP image ASIC error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 77 Check all connections on the SCB. Replace the SCB. 30.01.36 Upgrade Error Try downloading upgrade again Description Scanner firmware upgrade error. Recommended action 1. Re-send the scanner firmware upgrade. 2. If the error persists, replace the SCB. 30.01.41 Scanner error Description The formatter lost connections with the SCB or communication was corrupted. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Remove and reinstall the formatter making to verify it is properly seated. 3. Upgrade the firmware. 4. Verify that all cables are connected to the product and to the interconnect board / formatter and SCB. 5. Verify that the scanner control board (SCB) has power. 6. Replace the scanner control board (SCB). 7. Replace the formatter. 30.01.42 Scanner error Description Internal product communication error. Recommended action 78 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check all scanner control board (SCB) connectors are fully seated. 3. If this error occurs after a formatter, fax card or hard disk has been replaced, check that the formatter is fully seated and the “Smiley face” icon on the formatter is illuminated. Check the fax card for proper seating on the formatter. (If Fax card is not properly seated it can prevent the formatter from seating properly. 4. If the error persists, replace the scanner control board (SCB). Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 30.01.43 Scanner memory failure Description Scan memory error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then re-seat the formatter. 3. If the error persists, replace the formatter. 30.01.44 Description Copy processor (CPB) / scanner control board (SCB) communication error Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the scanner cable. 3. Upgrade the firmware. 4. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then re-seat the formatter. 5. If the error persists, replace the scanner control board (SCB) or the formatter. 30.01.45 Description Internal copy processor board (CPB) communication error. CPB code assertion error for the copy processor board firmware. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then re-seat the formatter. 3. Upgrade the firmware. 4. If the error persists, replace the scanner control board (SCB). 5. If the error persists, replace the formatter. 30.01.46 Scanner Error Description The firmware cannot find the copy processor board (CPB). ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 79 Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then re-seat the formatter. 3. If the error persists, replace the scanner control board (SCB). 30.01.48 Scanner error Description Scanner error. Scanner power is not connected. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then check the scanner wire-harness connectors and the scanner power supply fan. 3. If the error persists, replace integrated scanning assembly (ISA). 30.01.50 Scanner error Description Internal scanner control board (SCB) error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Upgrade the firmware (FW). 3. If the error persists, replace the SCB. 30.03.14 Description A non-fatal error has occurred. A scanner EEPROM (NVM) error has occurred. Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. 30.03.20 Description The copy processor board firmware cannot communicate with the PCA on the optical assembly. 80 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Verify that the flat flexible cables (FFCs) between scanner and the SCB are connected and properly seated. 3. Replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA). 30.03.22 Scanner failure Description Front side illumination calibration failure. The scan module cannot see the illumination module, or marginal illumination. The optical assembly may not be parked under the calibration strip. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Upgrade the firmware. 3. Check the service event log for other scanner errors, and then resolve those errors. 4. Check the scan module flat flexible cable (FFC) connection. 5. Replace the integrated scanning assembly (ISA). 30.03.23 Scanner failure Description Flatbed alignment calibration error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Upgrade the firmware. 3. Replace the scanner. 30.03.30 Scanner Failure Description Flatbed motor shutdown. The scanner control board cannot communicate with the flatbed scanner motor. Recommended action ENWW 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. As the product turns on, verify that the scan head moves. 2. Verify that the drive belt is in the correct position. 3. Run diagnostics on the flatbed scanner to see if the scan bar moves. Tools for troubleshooting 81 4. Check the cable connection to the SCB. 5. Replace the scanner. 30.03.45 Scanner Error To continue turn off then on Description Scanner control board (SCB) firmware assertion failure. SCB firmware assert controls the scan head motor. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Upgrade the firmware. 3. Replace the Scanner control board (SCB). 4. Replace the scanner assembly. 31.XX.YZ Error Messages — X585 only 31.01.03 Document feeder pick error Description The document feeder cannot pick up paper. Recommended action 1. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 2. Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded and the tray guides are properly aligned to both edges of the media. 3. Check and clean the rollers and separation pad, and test the registration sensor. If needed, replace pickup roller assembly and separation pad. 4. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If the motor turns, then the motor is good. 5. Verify that the motor cables are connected. 6. Re-seat the document feeder to the scanner control board (SCB). 7. Replace the document feeder assembly. 31.01.47 Document feeder not detected Description The document feeder was not detected, and might not be document feeder connected. The flatbed glass is still available for scanning. Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. If error persists, replace document feeder 82 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: Before replacing the document feeder technicians should check the connections for the unit to make sure they are correctly and firmly seated. 31.03.14 Description Backside scanner EEPROM (NVM) error. A non-fatal error has occurred. Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. 31.03.20 backside scanner not detected Description Backside scanner not detected. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Verify the cables between scanner and scanner control board are connected. 3. Replace the document feeder assembly 31.03.22 Scanner calibration failure Description Backside illumination calibration failure. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Upgrade the firmware. 3. Verify the cables between scanner and scanner control board are connected. 4. Replace the document feeder assembly. 31.03.30 Document feeder pick motor error Description The document feeder pick motor is not turning. Recommended action ENWW 1. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 2. Make sure that the feed tray is not overloaded. 3. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and then resolve any errors first. 4. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If the motor turns, then the motor is good. Tools for troubleshooting 83 5. Verify that the motor cables are connected. 6. Re-seat the document feeder to the scanner control board (SCB). 7. Replace the document feeder assembly. 31.03.31 Document feeder motor stall Description The document feeder feed motor is not turning. Recommended action 1. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 2. Make sure that the feed tray is not overloaded. 3. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and then resolve any errors first. 4. Verify that the motor cables are connected. 5. Re-seat the document feeder to the scanner control board (SCB). 6. Replace the document feeder assembly. 31.03.32 Description The document feeder de-skew motor is not turning. Recommended action 1. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 2. Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded. 3. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and then resolve any errors first. 4. Verify that the motor cables are connected. 5. Re-seat the document feeder to scanner control board (SCB) cables. 6. Replace the document feeder assembly. 31.03.33 Backside scanner calibration area dirty Description The white area used for backside scanner calibration is dirty. Recommended action 84 1. Remove the white background and clean it. 2. Clean the backside scanner glass. 3. If issue remains replace the document feeder assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 31.03.34 Background missing Description The removable background for the backside scanner is either missing or not fully snapped into place. Recommended action 1. Remove the white background and clean it. 2. Clean the backside scanner glass. 3. If issue remains replace the document feeder assembly. No action necessary. 31.13.00 Document feeder multi-pick error Description A multiple pick error was reported by the document feeder assembly. Recommended action 1. Open the document feeder cover, pull ALL the sheets back into the tray and then resume the job. 2. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 3. Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded and the tray guides are properly aligned to both edges of the media. 4. Check and clean the rollers and separation pad, and test the registration sensor. If needed, replace pickup roller assembly and separation pad. 5. Verify that the motor cables are connected. 6. Re-seat the document feeder to the scanner control board (SCB). 7. Replace the document feeder assembly. 31.13.01 Description Document feeder job error, pick error. Paper pick was initiated, but the page didn't did not make it to the pick success sensor. Recommended action ENWW 1. Open the document feeder lid, pull sheets back into input tray, and then resume the job. 2. Check the paper guides and make sure that they are set to the correct paper width. 3. Make sure that the input tray is not overloaded and the tray guides are properly aligned to both edges of the media. 4. Check the document feeder page count for roller life. 5. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. Tools for troubleshooting 85 6. Clean the document feeder pick and feeder rollers and clean separation pad If worn or damage replace roller kit. 7. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests 8. Actuate the Pick-Success Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the document feeder. 9. If sensor is not available for replacement or does not resolve issue replace the document feeder assembly. 31.13.02 Description Document feeder job error, feed jam. The paper passed the pick success sensor, and then jammed in the document feeder paper path. Recommended action 1. Clear the paper path and try feeding the page again. 2. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 3. Check the paper guides and make sure that they are set to the correct paper width. 4. Verify that the paper path is clear. 5. Clean the document feeder pick and feeder rollers and clean separation pad. If worn or damage replace roller kit. 6. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests 7. Actuate the Paper-Path Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the sensor. 8. If sensor is not available for replacement or does not resolve issue replace the document feeder assembly. 31.13.13 Description The document feeder jam access door is open. 86 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Verify that the jam access cover is closed. 2. Verify that the flag is not broken off. 3. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests 4. Actuate the document feeder Jam Cover Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the Sensor. 5. If not available for replacement or does not resolve issue replace the document feeder assembly. 31.13.14 Description Document feeder job error, over current. This is a feed jam in the document feeder, and the motor is not turning. Recommended action 1. Verify that the paper meets the product specifications. 2. Make sure that the document feeder input tray is not overloaded. 3. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and then resolve any errors first. 4. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If there is no error, then the motor is good. 5. Verify that the motor cables are connected. 6. Re-seat the document feeder to the scanner control board (SCB). 7. Replace the document feeder. 31.13.15 Description This is a duplex re-feed jam in the document feeder. The paper jam occurs on the back-side copy. The duplex re-feed does not make it to the deskew sensor. Recommended action ENWW 1. Remove the jammed paper. 2. Verify that there is nothing in the paper path of the duplex refeed area. Tools for troubleshooting 87 3. Retry the copy job. 4. Replace the document feeder assembly. 32.08.XX Error Messages 32.08.A1, 32.08.A2, 32.08.A3 Description 32.08.A1 (event code) Shutdown event-boot after abnormal shutdown. 32.08.A2 (event code) Boot from normal shutdown event. 32.08.A3 (event code) Regular boot event. Recommended action No action necessary. 32.1C.XX Description 32.1C.05 (event code) The restore job ticket was submitted with invalid credentials. 32.1C.06 (event code) The backup job ticket was submitted with invalid credentials. 32.1C.07(event code) Backup restore permissions error. There was an error during the creation, read, or write of the restore file. 32.1C.08 (event code) Not enough disk space to perform backup/restore or network share issue. There was an error during the creation, read, or write of the backup file. 32.1C.09 (event code) Tried to restore a backup file that was not valid for this product. The data in the backup file specified in the restore job ticket is no longer valid due to a corruption of the data or no loner present. 32.1C.0A (event code) Backup file is invalid. 88 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW The data in the backup file specified in the restore job ticket is no longer valid due to a corruption of the data or no loner present. 32.1C.0D (event code) Backup/restore failed, auto-reboot failed, or the product might be busy. 32.1C.11 (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the engine. The backup was aborted because the product is busy. 32.1C.13 (event code) and 32.1C.14 (event code) Not enough space exists to perform the backup. The backup was aborted because the disk is at a critical level or full. Scheduled backup failure. 32.1C.15 (event code) Restore aborted because the backup file was created by a previous version of firmware no longer supported by the feature. 32.1C.2E (event code) The restore was aborted because the product is busy. 32.1C.2F (event code) Reset failure 32.1C.40 (event code) The backup operation completed successfully (informational). 32.1C.41 (event code) The backup operation encountered an error (informational). 32.1C.42 (event code) The backup operation completed, but with a warning message (informational). 32.1C.43 (event code) A component in the backup file is not supported by the current version of firmware and will not be restored (informational). 32.1C.44 (event code) A component in the backup file is not transferable to another product and will not be restored (informational). 32.1C.45 (event code) Some data was not included in the backup file (informational). 32.1C.46 (event code) ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 89 An expected component could not be found and was thus not backed up. Because components should be known on backups, this code is a warning (informational). 32.1C.47 (event code) Some data was not restored from the backup file (informational). 32.1C.48 (event code) The backup job ticket was submitted using an invalid network path. 32.1C.49 (event code) The backup job ticket was submitted with a bad encryption. 32.1C.4A (event code) An error occurred when creating the temporary directories used to store the backup files in transition to and from the compressed (ZIP) file. 32.1C.56 (event code) Reset aborted. Backup/restore in progress (informational). 32.1C.57 (event code) Reset aborted (informational). 32.1C.58 (event code) Unknown reset error (informational). 32.1C.60 (event code) The restore operation completed successfully (informational). 32.1C.61 (event code) The restore operation encountered an error. 32.1C.62 (event code) The restore operation completed, but with a warning message. 32.1C.68 (event code) The restore job ticket was submitted using an invalid network path. 32.1C.69 (event code) The restore job ticket was submitted with a bad encryption personal identification number (PIN). 32.1C.6A (event code) An error occurred when creating the temporary directories used to store the restore files in transition to and from the compressed (ZIP) file. 32.1C.6D (event code) An unusual error occurred when running the restore. 90 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 32.1C.05 (event code) Verify the credentials that were submitted. Check the domain, user name, and password. 32.1C.06 (event code) Verify the credentials that were submitted. Check the domain, user name, and password. 32.1C.07 (event code) Retry the job. 32.1C.08 (event code) ● Retry the job. ● Remove stored jobs and retry. ● Use a larger capacity storage device. ● Check the network share. Remove any stored jobs, and then retry. If the error persists, try using a larger capacity storage device and check the network share settings. 32.1C.09 (event code) Use a valid backup file. 32.1C.0A (event code) Use a valid backup file. Reboot, and then observe the state of the product. If the error persists, perform a partition clean from the Preboot menu. 32.1C.0D (event code) Reboot, and then retry the backup/restore. 32.1C.11 (event code) Wait until the product is idle, and then try again. 32.1C.13 (event code) and 32.1C.14 (event code) Free up disk space, and then try again. 32.1C.15 (event code) - Use the current backup file. 32.1C.2E (event code) Wait until the product is idle, and then try again. Turn the product off then on, and then retry. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 91 32.1C.2F (event code) Turn the product off then on, and then retry. 32.1C.40 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.41 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.42 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.43 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.44 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.45 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.46 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.47 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.48 (event code) Check that a share was provided as part of the network path (not blank). Check that the server and the share exists. Check that the user has permission to access the share on the provided server. 32.1C.49 (event code) Verify that the encryption personal identification number (PIN) meets the restrictions for the product. 32.1C.4A (event code) Retry the job. If this does not resolve the issue, turn the product off then on again and retry the job. If the error persists, perform a Partial Clean using the Preboot menu. 32.1C.56 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.57 (event code) 92 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW No action necessary. 32.1C.58 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.60 (event code) No action necessary. 32.1C.61 (event code) Review the error log to see specific details about the failure. 32.1C.62 (event code) Review the error log to see specific details about the failure. 32.1C.68 (event code) Check that a share was provided as part of the network path (not blank). Check that the server and the share exist. Check that the user has permission to access the share on the provided server. Check that the path includes the compressed (ZIP) file name as part of the path 32.1C.69 (event code) Verify the encryption personal identification number (PIN) is the same PIN used to encrypt the backup file. 32.1C.6A (event code) Retry the job. 32.1C.6D (event code) Retry the job. 33.XX.YZ Error Messages 33.02.01 Used board/disk installed Description Used board disk installed. An encrypted board or disk with existing data previously locked to a different product has replaced the original. If you continue, data is permanently lost. Recommended action ENWW 1. Reinstall the used board or disk back into its original printer. 2. To save the data on the board or disk, turn the product off. Replace the board or disk with another board or disk. 3. To delete the data on the board or disk and continue, touch the OK button. Tools for troubleshooting 93 33.03.03 Incompatible formater installed. Description This is and EFI BIOS event to prevent booting with the wrong formatter installed. Recommended action Power down the printer and install the correct formatter in the device. NOTE: If it is believed that the formatter is the correct part number and model for this printer, replace the formatter again and return the formatter in question to HP for evaluation. 33.03.XX Description ● 33.03.01: Save recover engine storage ID unexpected length. ● 33.03.02: Data size mismatch unable to reocver DCC MVRAM. Recommended action Power the printer off then back on. If issue is not resolved replace the ICB and return to HP for evaluation. 40.XX.YZ Error Messages 40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The USB buffer has overflowed. Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to print the transferred date (some data might be lost). 2. Check the host configuration. 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The product has experienced a JetDirect buffer overflow. Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to print the transferred date (some data might be lost). 2. Check the host configuration. 40.00.03 EIO buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An incorrect communications protocol might be in use. 94 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred date (some data might be lost). 40.00.04 EIO bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” Description The connection between the product and the USB device has been broken. Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing. 2. Remove, and then reinstall the USB device. 40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” Description The USB device has been removed. Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to clear the error message (data will be lost). 2. Install the USB device. 40.08.0X USB storage accessory removed Description X = 0 or ;1 information code. Secure file erase is enabled. Recommended action No action necessary. 40.0X.05 USB storage accessory removed Description X = 1, 2, 3, 5, or 6; information code. The USB storage accessory was removed. Recommended action No action necessary. 41.XX.YZ Error Messages 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in tray Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 95 Y = Type, Z = Tray ● Y = 0 Size mismatch. Detected media is longer or shorter than expected. ● Y = A Size mismatch. Detected media too long. ● Y = B Size mismatch. Detected media too short. ● Y = C Size mismatch. Inter-page gap error. ● Z = D Source is the duplexer. ● Z = 1 Source is Tray 1. ● Z = 2 Source is Tray 2. ● Z = 3 Source is Tray 3. Recommended action 1. Touch OK to use another tray. 2. Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted. 3. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the cassette media switch is correctly functioning. 4. If the issue persists, replace the Mech kit. 42.XX.YY Error Messages 42.XX.YY Error Event Log message Description Internal system failure. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, then on, and then retry. 2. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 44.XX.XX Error Messages 44.01.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A digital send error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. No action necessary. This error message should automatically clear. 96 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 44.02.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Personal address book error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check Digital Send configuration and address book. 44.03.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A digital send error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. 44.04.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Digital Send Email error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. 44.05.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Digital Send Folder Job error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. 44.07.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Digital Send Remote Printer Job Error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 97 44.08.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description SharePoint Job Error has occurred. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, cancel and then restart the job. 2. If the error occurs repeatedly, reboot the engine and retry the job. 3. If error still persists, reset to factory settings. Upgrade to most current firmware. 44.10.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A send to email error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. 44.11.0E Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description The attachment filename already exists at the destination, and the flag to fail on filename collisions was set. This file will not be sent. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, use a different filename or verify that the filename is not already in use. 2. If the issue persists, use a unique filename or disable the flag to fail on filename collision. 44.11.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A Digital Send error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. 44.12.0E Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Digital Send, the attachment filename already exists at the destination, and the flag to fail on filename collisions is set. This file will not be sent. 98 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, use a different filename or verify that the filename is not already in use. 2. If the issue persists, use a unique filename or disable the flag to fail on filename collision. 44.12.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A Digital Send error has occurred. Recommended action Try to send the job again. Check the Digital Send configuration. 44.16.01 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A Digital Send error has occurred while trying to create file type. XX = ● 01 – RTF File ● 03 – CSV File ● 04 – HTML File ● 05 – XML File ● 06 – XPS File ● 07 – PDF File Recommended action 1. Try to send the job again. 2. Check Digital Send configuration. 44.16.02 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description The destination URL was found to be invalid or unreachable. Recommended action ENWW 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, cancel and then restart the job. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off and then on and retry the job. 3. If error still persists, reset to factory settings. Upgrade to current version of firmware. Tools for troubleshooting 99 44.16.03 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description The destination URL is not a SharePoint site. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and then restart the job. 2. If the error persists, ● Check network connection settings. ● Verify access to the SharePoint site. 44.16.04 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Credentials associated with the SharePoint destination were found to be invalid or missing. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and then restart the job. 2. If the error persists, ● Check network connection settings. ● Verify access to the SharePoint site. 44.16.05 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Credentials do not have write access to the SharePoint destination. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and then restart the job. 2. If the error persists, ● Check network connection settings. ● Verify access to the SharePoint site. 44.16.06 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Upload of image file failed. Reason unknown. 100 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and then restart the job. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off then on again and retry the job. 3. If error still persists, reset to factory settings. Upgrade to current firmware version. 44.16.07 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Upload of image file failed. The file exceeded the maximum form submission length on the Web server. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, send fewer pages in the job, lower the DPI of the scanned pages, or select a file type that splits pages into separate files (for example, jpeg). 2. If the error persists repeatedly, contact the SharePoint site administrator to increase the Web server's maximum form submission length. 44.16.08 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Upload of image file failed. The SharePoint site storage quota limit was exceeded. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, make space on the SharePoint site by deleting some files, and then retry the job. 2. If the error occurs repeatedly, contact the SharePoint site administrator to increase the storage quota limit. 44.16.09 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Upload of image file failed. A folder or filename length is too long. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, check the destination URL and filename in the SharePoint job configuration to verify no folder or filename exceeds the maximum of 128 characters. 2. If the error occurs repeatedly, try sending to a different folder on the SharePoint site or changing the filename (which could include prefix or suffix). 44.16.0A Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Upload of the image file failed. The image file already exists on the server and is checked out for editing by another user. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 101 Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify that the filename used by the job is not checked out on the SharePoint site. 2. If the error occurs persists, use a different filename for the job. 44.16.0B Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Upload of the image file failed. The image file already exists on the server and the job was set to not overwrite files. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, set the job to overwrite existing files. 2. If the error occurs persists, use a different filename for the job. 44.16.0D Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Encountered an unexpected processing error while transferring attachments to the destination SharePoint. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and restart the job. 2. If the error persists, turn the product off, and then on and retry the job. 3. If error continues, reset to factory settings. Upgrade to current version of firmware. 44.16.0E Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description The attachment filename already exists at the destination, and the flag to fail on filename collisions was set. This file will not be sent. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, use a different filename or verify that the filename is not already in use. 2. If the issue persists, use a unique filename or disable the flag to fail on filename collision. 44.16.0F Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Not enough memory to process the current SharePoint Job. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, cancel and/or restart the job, breaking it up into small jobs. 2. Repeat this process if the error persists until job goes through. 102 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 44.16.10 Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description SharePoint server is using an invalid certificate. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, send the SharePoint job to a non-secure address, or send the job to a SharePoint server that has a valid certificate. 2. If the error occurs repeatedly, send the job to a different, trusted SharePoint server. 44.16.FF Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description Unexpected error occurred in the SharePoint resource device code. Recommended action 1. If this is the first time the error has occurred, verify settings in job configuration and restart the job. 2. If error persists, turn the product off, and then on and retry the job. 3. If error continues, reset to factory settings. Upgrade to current version of firmware. 44.34.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A fax error has occurred. Recommended action 1. Try to send the job again. 2. Check the fax configuration 44.90.XX Error Event log message - 44.91.XX Error Event log message - 44.92.XX Error Event log message (Multifunction product only.) Description A fax error has occurred. Recommended action 1. Try to send the job again. 2. Check the fax configuration. 45.WX.YZ Error Messages 45.00.YZ Description Event log entry only All 45.00.YZ events are OXPd/Webkit informational log entries. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 103 Recommended action No action necessary. 47.XX.XX Error Messages 47.00.XX Description Back channel internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.01.XX Description Image transformer internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.02.XX Description Job parser internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.03.XX Description Print job internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 104 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 47.04.XX Description Print spooler 9100 internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.05.00 Description Print spooler framework internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.06.XX Description Print application internal error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Resend the print job. 3. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.WX.YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue, touch “OK” Description The device is unable to access or implement one of the image patterns files. Y = Calibration type, Z = Event ENWW ● 47.FC.00 (event code) Color plane registration (CPR) Image not found at system initialization ● 47.FC.01 (event code) CPR Store Image failure ● 47.FC.02 (event code) CPR Image not found ● 47.FC.03 (event code) CPR Print engine execution failure ● 47.FC.10 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Image not found at system initialization ● 47.FC.11 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Store image failure Tools for troubleshooting 105 ● 47.FC.12 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Image not found ● 47.FC.13 (event code) Consecutive Dmax Dhalf Print engine execution failure ● 47.FC.20 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found at system initialization ● 47.FC.21 (event code) Error Diffusion Store image failure ● 47.FC.22 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found ● 47.FC.23 Error Diffusion Print engine execution failure ● 47.FC.30 0 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found at system initialization ● 47.FC.31 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Store image failure ● 47.FC.32 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found ● 47.FC.33 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Print engine execution failure ● 47.FC.40 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found at system initialization ● 47.FC.41 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Store image failure ● 47.FC.42 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found ● 47.FC.43 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Print engine execution failure Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. If the error persists over multiple power cycles frequently and consistently on a unit then do the following. ● In the Administration/Troubleshooting/Diagnostics, run the hard disk tests to validate health of the device. Fix any issue found with the mass storage device 3. If the error persists, reload the firmware. 4. If the error persists, clear the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu then reload the firmware. 48.XX.YY Error Messages 48.XX.YY Description A job framework internal error has occurred. Recommended action 1. No action should be necessary. 2. If the error persists, upgrade the product firmware. 3. If the issue persists, continue troubleshooting with the flowcharts for either Intermittent or Persistent 49 error troubleshooting (whichever is appropriate) in document c03122817, “HP LaserJet FutureSmart Devices - 49 Error Troubleshooting (Persistent and Intermittent)”. 106 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 49.XX.YY Error Messages 49.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description A firmware error occurred. Corrupted print jobs, software application issues, non-product specific print drivers, poor quality USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect configurations, invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories can cause this error. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, check the following: ● The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem, such as a bad interface cable, a bad USB port, or an invalid network configuration setting. ● The error might be caused by the print job, due to an invalid print driver, a problem with the software application, or a problem with the file being printed. ● Upgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error. See the product user guide for more information. When a 49 error occurs, the user sees a 49.XXXX message on the control panel (where XXXX is replaced by a combination of letters and numbers). A 49 error might happen at any time for multiple reasons. Although some types of 49 errors can be caused by hardware failures, it is more common for 49 errors to be caused by printing a specific document or performing some task on the product. 49 errors most often occur when a product is asked to perform an action that the product firmware is not capable of and might not have been designed to comply with, such as: ● Printing files with unsupported programming commands ● A unique combination of user environment and user interactions with the product ● Interfacing with a third-party solution that was not designed to work with the product ● Specific timing, network traffic, or concurrent processing of jobs Each of these interactions could cause the product firmware to initiate an action that the product cannot accomplish. In situations like this, the product might present the error if it has no other option. When these errors occur, the only way to recover is to turn the product's power off and back on. NOTE: LaserJet formatter PCAs are rarely the root cause of 49 service errors. Please do not replace the formatter or flash unless troubleshooting has identified the formatter as the root cause. If the error persists, continue troubleshooting with the flowcharts for either Intermittent or Persistent 49 error troubleshooting (whichever is appropriate) in document c03122817, “HP LaserJet FutureSmart Devices - 49 Error Troubleshooting (Persistent and Intermittent)”. 54.XX.YZ Error Messages 54.30.00 Calibration error Description An engine calibration has failed. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 107 Details of which calibration and failure reason can be found in the payload. 610000AC Sensor_Cms_Calibrate_Unknown_Sensor Tried to start a page calibration scan with an unknown sensor ID. Only Zim and BDD sensors are recognized. 610000AD Sensor_Cms_Calibrate_Invalid_Sensor A sensor other than Zim was specified for the pen calibration scan. 610000AE Sensor_Cms_Calibrate_Overshoot The paper advanced too far during a page calibration such that the printed artifact could not be scanned. This assert could happen if the mech wasn't able to stop the paper movement accurately. Recommended action 1. Turn the power off on the product by pressing the power button and holding it for more than 3 seconds. 2. Unplug power cord from back of product and wait 30 seconds. 3. Plug power cord back into product. 4. Turn the power on to the product using power button. 5. If the error condition is cleared then the issue is resolved, if not continue to step 6. 6. Repeat steps 1 & 2. 7. Remove the formatter, check formatter thoroughly for loose any connections and reseat them, then reinstall the formatter. 8. Repeat steps 3 & 4. 9. If the error condition is cleared then the issue is resolved, if issue is not resolved replace the Mech Kit. NOTE: It is critical to either print the event log after power cycle clears issue, or access the event log through EWS and capture the 8 character fail code value corresponding to the 61.00.0X and log it into the case. Look for the last 61.00.0x error that occurred which also has the 8 character value under the text description. This value is critical in HP understanding the failure and debugging potential field issues. 58.XX error messages 58.10.02 Ink Sensor Failure Description SHAID electrical failure. Recommended action 1. Turn the power off on the product by pressing the power button and holding it for more than 3 seconds. 2. Unplug power cord from back of product and wait 30 seconds. 3. Plug power cord back into product. 4. Turn the power on to the product using power button. 5. If the error condition is cleared then the issue is resolved, if not continue to step 6. 6. Repeat steps 1 & 2. 108 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 7. Remove the formatter, check formatter thoroughly for loose any connections and reseat them, then reinstall the formatter. 8. Repeat steps 3 & 4. 9. If the error condition is cleared then the issue is resolved, if issue is not resolved replace the Mech Kit. 61.00.0X Error Messages 61.00.01 Print Engine Error 61.00.02 Print Engine Error 61.00.03 Print Engine Error Description The print engine has encountered an error. The payload data will be included which will be with the error code, and description string. Service_Station_Cap_Home_Long (6100000D) Paper_Load_Tray1_Pick_Motor (6100002D) Paper_Load_Pick_Tire_Index_Sensor (6100002E) Service_Station_Cap_Home_Short (6100000E) SS_Restricted_Movement_Error (61000011) Lift_Restricted_Movement_Error (61000012) Carriage_Restricted_Movement_Error (61000013) Service_Move_To_Tranny_State (610000C8) DPU_Printbar_Crash_Into_Service_Station (610000D3) DPU_Service_Station_Under_Print_Bar (610000D4) Printbar_Clutch_Slippage (61000035) Service_Station_Pen_Too_Cold (6100000B) Service_Station_Home_Failure (6100000C) Service_Carriage_Home_Invalid (610000C9) Pen_Start_Up_Spits_Already_Done (6100004E) Recommended action ENWW 1. Turn the power off on the product by pressing the power button and holding it for more than 3 seconds. 2. Unplug power cord from back of product and wait 30 seconds. 3. Plug power cord back into product. 4. Turn the power on to the product using power button. 5. If the error condition is cleared then the issue is resolved, if not continue to step 6. 6. Repeat steps 1 & 2. Tools for troubleshooting 109 7. Remove the formatter, check formatter thoroughly for loose any connections and reseat them, then reinstall the formatter. 8. Repeat steps 3 & 4. 9. If the error condition is cleared then the issue is resolved, if issue is not resolved replace the Mech Kit. NOTE: It is critical to either print the event log after power cycle clears issue, or access the event log through EWS and capture the 8 character fail code value corresponding to the 61.00.0X and log it into the case. Look for the last 61.00.0x error that occurred which also has the 8 character value under the text description. This value is critical in HP understanding the failure and debugging potential field issues. 81.XX.YY, 82.XX.YY Error Messages 81.WX.00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on Description A wireless network component on the product has failed. 81.02.00 Wireless network Event 81.07.00 Internal Wireless Networking event Recommended action 1. Turn the product off then on. 2. Turn the product off, reseat the wireless network component and turn the product back on. 3. If error persists, replace the wireless network component. 81.WX.YZ Embedded Jetdirect Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an embedded HP Jetdirect print server critical error. 81.01.00 EIO Event 81.03.00 Access Point Wireless Network event 81.04.00 JetDirect inside Network event 81.06.00 Internal EIO Networking event 81.08.00 Internal Access Point Wireless Network event 81.09.00 Internal JetDirect inside Network event Recommended action 1. Turn the product off then on. 2. Turn the product off, reseat the EIO accessory and turn the product back on. 3. If error persists replace the formatter. 110 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 82.73.45, Disk Successfully cleaned. Description Event log only, disk successfully cleaned. Recommended action No action necessary. 82.73.46, 82.73.47 Description A hard disk or compact flash disk cleaning failed. This error is usually caused by a failure of the disk hardware. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. 98.0X.0Y Error Messages 98.00.01 or 98.01.00 Corrupt data in firmware volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the firmware volume. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. 98.00.02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the solutions volume. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. 98.00.03 Corrupt data in the configuration volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the configuration volume. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 111 Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Download the firmware again, and then attempt the upgrade again. 3. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 4. Reload the firmware. 98.00.04 Corrupt data in the job data volume Description Data corrupt has occurred in the job data volume. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Rerun the file erase function. 99.XX.YY Error Messages 99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. This is a CRC error in the firmware image (bad image). Recommended action Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again. 99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The issue is an I/O timeout when reading the header number and size. It indicates a problem with the network environment, not the product. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product, and then attempt the firmware upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port. 99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. This is a disk error. It might indicate a problem or a hard disk failure. It might be necessary to check the connection to the hard disk or replace the hard disk. 112 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, run the Clean Disk process from the Preboot menu. You will need to download the firmware from the Preboot menu. 3. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The issue is an I/O timeout when reading the header. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product, and then attempt the firmware upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port. 99.00.05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The issue is an I/O timeout when reading image data. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good network connection to the product, and then attempt the firmware upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port. 99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The issue is an unexpected read error when reading the header number and size. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The issue is an unexpected read error when reading the rest of the header. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 113 Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The issue is an unexpected read error when reading image data. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file, and then attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The RFU was canceled by the user. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.10 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The RFU was canceled by the user when reading the header number and size. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.11 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The RFU was canceled by the user when reading the rest of the header. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. 114 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW The header number is 1, but the header size does not match version 1 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model, and then resend the RFU. 99.00.13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The header number is 2, but the header size does not match version 2 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model, and then resend the RFU. 99.00.14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The file is invalid. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model, and then resend the RFU. 99.00.2X Description There is a compatibility issue with the firmware. The specific message varies depending on the cause, but the solution for each message is the same. ● 99.00.20 (event log) The bundle is not for this product. ● 99.00.21 (event log) The bundle is not signed with the correct signature, or the signature is invalid. ● 99.00.22 (event log) The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware. ● 99.00.23 (event log) The package header version is not supported by this firmware. ● ENWW 99.00.24 (event log) Tools for troubleshooting 115 The format of the bundle is invalid. ● 99.00.25 (event log) The format of the package is invalid. ● 99.00.26 (event log) A CRC32 check did not pass. ● 99.00.27 (event log) An I/O error occurred while downloading the bundle. Recommended action Download the correct firmware file from www.hp.com, and then resend the firmware upgrade. 99.00.27 only: 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Resend the firmware upgrade. 3. If the error persists, try installing the upgrade by another method (USB or Embedded Web Server). 99.01.XX Description A firmware install error has occurred. The specific message varies depending on the cause, but the solution for each message is the same. ● 99.01.00 ● 99.01.10 ● 99.01.20 ● 99.01.21 Recommended action Reload the firmware. 99.02.01 Description Firmware installation was successful. Recommended action No action necessary. 99.02.09 Description Firmware upgrade cancelled by user. 116 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary. 99.09.60 Unsupported disk Description This is a Preboot menu error. The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product. Recommended action Install the correct hard disk for this product. 99.09.61 Unsupported disk Description This is a Preboot menu error. The installed disk is installed in a product configured for an encrypted hard disk. Recommended action Access the Preboot menu, and then select Lock Disk to lock the disk. 99.09.62 Unknown disk Description This error indicates that there is an encryption mismatch between the HDD and the formatter. This typically happens because an HDD was swapped into a device from another device. Recommended action Install a new disk or use the Preboot menu unlock the disk. If a disk is to be reused in a different product, execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot, and then reload the firmware and lock the disk. 99.09.63 Incorrect disk Description This error indicates that the expected encrypted HDD is not present. This is expected behavior when installing a new HDD in a device where the previous HDD was encrypted. Recommended action Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk, and then lock the disk to this product. 99.09.64 Disk malfunction Description A fatal hard disk failure has occurred. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 117 Recommended action Replace the hard disk. 99.09.65 Disk data error Description Disk data corruption has occurred. Recommended action Use the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu, and then resend the RFU. 99.09.66 No disk installed Description A disk drive is not installed in the product. Recommended action 1. Install a compatible hard disk drive. 2. If a compatible hard disk is installed, reseat the hard disk to make sure that it is connected correctly. 3. If the error persists, replace the hard disk drive. 99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware Description This is an error indicating that there is no firmware installed on the disk. This is usually the result of installing a new disk or performing a Clean Disk operation from the Preboot menu. Recommended action 1. Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu. 2. Press the Help button to see the help text for the error. 3. Select the Administration menu. NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the administrator, a prompt to enter the product displays. Enter the password to proceed. 4. Select the Download item, and then download the latest firmware. The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product. 99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware Description This is an error indicating that there is no firmware installed on the disk. This is usually the result of installing a new disk or performing a Clean Disk operation from the Preboot menu. 118 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Press any button to continue to the main Preboot menu. 2. Press the Help button to see the help text for the error. 3. Select the Administration menu. NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the administrator, a prompt to enter the product displays. Enter the password to proceed. 4. Select the Download item, and then download the latest firmware. The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product. 99.XX.YY Description A message of this form indicates a firmware installation error. Recommended action Reload the firmware. Alpha Error Messages FIM Load Error Send full FIM on port Description The product displays this message before the firmware is loaded at startup if an error has occurred during a firmware upgrade. Recommended action Resend the firmware upgrade. full Remove all paper from bin Description The specified output bin is full. Recommended action Empty the bin to continue printing. almost full Description The ink collection unit is almost full. Recommended action Replace the ink collection unit. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 119 low OR Supplies low Description The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is low. Actual ink cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the ink cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximate end of life, the HP Premium protection warrant ends. very low OR Supplies very low Description The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is low. Actual ink cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the ink cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximate end of life, the HP Premium protection warrant ends. lifting Description The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray. ● X = 2: Tray 2 ● X = 3: Tray 3 Recommended action No action necessary. [File System] device failure To clear touch “OK” Description The specified device has failed. 120 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. [File System] file operation failure To clear touch “OK” Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an invalid operation. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. [File System] file system is full To clear touch “OK” Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. [File System] is not initialized Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. [File System] is write protected Description The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Accept bad signature Description The product is performing a remote firmware upgrade and the code signature is invalid. Recommended action Download the correct firmware upgrade file for the product, and then reinstall the upgrade. See the product user guide for more information. Automatic Document Feeder cover open Description The document feeder cover is open. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 121 Recommended action Close the document feeder cover. Bad optional tray connection Description The optional tray is not connected, not connected correctly, or a connection is not working correctly. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove and then reinstall the optional tray. 3. Reconnect the connectors for the tray. 4. Turn the product on. 5. If the error persists, replace the connector for the tray. Calibration reset pending Description A calibration reset occurs when all jobs are processed. Recommended action To begin the reset sooner, cancel all jobs by pressing the Stop button. Canceling Description The product is canceling the current job. Recommended action No action necessary. Canceling... Description The product is canceling the current job . Recommended action No action necessary. Cartridge Problem; Ink cartridge problem Description The product has detected that a cartridge is missing or damaged. Recommended action Replace the cartridge indicated in the error message. 122 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Checking engine Description The product is conducting an internal test. Recommended action No action necessary. Checking paper path Description The product is checking for possible paper jams. Recommended action No action necessary. Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK” Description A print job requested a product language (personality) that is not available for this product. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory. Recommended action Print the job by using a print driver for a different language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. Clear Output Area Description The product has detected a jam in the output area. Recommended action Remove any paper from the output flap area. Make sure that the flap can open and close. If it cannot, replace the output flap. Clearing event log Description This message is displayed while the event log is cleared. The product exits the menus when the event log has been cleared. Recommended action No action necessary. Clearing paper path Description The product is attempting to eject jammed paper. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 123 Media is detected in the paper path. The product will attempt to eject it. Recommended action No action necessary. Check the progress at the bottom of the control panel display. If a jam is not cleared, remove the media. Close Ink Access Door Description The product has detected that the ink cartridge door is open. Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Run the test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the ink supply door open sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the front door open detection switch. 3. Check the sensor flag on the front door open detection sensor. If the flag is damaged, replace the ink supply door. Close Left door Description The product has detected that the left door is open. Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Check the sensor flag on the left door. If the flag is damaged, replace the left door assembly. Close upper Left door Description The product has detected that the left door is open. Recommended action 1. Close the door. 2. Check the sensor flag on the left door. If the flag is damaged, replace the left door assembly. Cooling device Description The product is cooling. Recommended action No action necessary. 124 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Counterfeit Cartridge Advisory Description This is a software message only. The product has detected a possibly counterfeit cartridge. Recommended action At the computer, click the hypertext link to report fraud, or click the Continue button to clear the message. Data received To print last page press “OK” Description The product is waiting for the command to print the last page. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the last page of the job. Do not use startup cartridges Description The startup cartridges that came with the product cannot be used after the product has been initialized. Recommended action Remove those cartridges, and then install non-startup cartridges. Document feeder Misfeed Description Document feeder misfeed. The product has detected a failure to feed paper through the document. Recommended action Reload the paper and try the job again. If the error persists, clean the document feeder pickup and feed rollers. Document feeder not detected Description The document feeder was not detected when the product initialized. Recommended action Make sure that the document feeder cables are connected and fully seated. Empty Ink Cartridge Description The product cannot detect ink in the indicated cartridge. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 125 Recommended action If ink is still present in the cartridge, touch the OK button to continue printing. If the cartridge is empty, replace the cartridge. Event log is empty Description No product events are in the log. Recommended action No action necessary. Expected drive missing Description The product cannot find the encrypted hard drive. Recommended action Install the encrypted hard drive. Fax is disabled — ignoring call Description The product received a call, but the fax feature was not configured with the required settings (country/ region, date/time, company name, fax number, etc.). Recommended action Use the Administration menu to configure the required fax settings. Flatbed cover open or Close Flatbed cover Description The platen glass cover is open or the open/closed sensor is not functioning correctly. Recommended action 1. Close the flatbed cover. 2. If the error persists, perform a sensors diagnostic in the Diagnostics menu on the product control panel to test the flatbed open/closed sensor. 3. Clean, adjust, or replace the sensor as needed. Gateways failed Description There is an incorrect gateways configuration. Recommended action Use the EIO Jetdirect menu to configure the default gateway. 126 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Gateways OK Description The gateways are configured correctly. Recommended action No action necessary. Genuine HP cartridge installed Description A new HP cartridge has been installed. The message appears for about 6 seconds before the product returns to the ready state. Recommended action No action necessary. Genuine HP supply installed Description A new genuine HP supply has been installed. Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message. HP Protected Cartridge Installed Description The product has detected cartridges that were locked in another product using the HP Cartridge Protection feature. ● 17.00.57 : (event code) Black cartridge ● 17.01.57 : (event code) Cyan cartridge ● 17.02.57 : (event code) Magenta cartridge ● 17.03.57 : (event code) Yellow cartridge Recommended action Cartridges locked in another product will not work in this product. Replace the cartridge indicated in the error message. HP Secure hard drive disabled Description The drive has been encrypted for another product. Recommended action Remove the drive or use the HP Embedded Web Server for more information. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 127 Incompatible ink cartridges Description The product has detected a cartridge or cartridges that are not for use with the product. ● 17.00.35 : (event code) Black cartridge ● 17.01.35 : (event code) Cyan cartridge ● 17.02.35 : (event code) Magenta cartridge ● 17.03.35 : (event code) Yellow cartridge Recommended action Replace the supply with one that is designed for this product. Initializing... Description The product is starting. Recommended action No action necessary. Ink cartridges depleted Description One or more of the ink cartridges is empty. ● 17.00.80 : (event code) Black cartridge 17.01.80 : (event code) Cyan cartridge 17.02.80 : (event code) Magenta cartridge 17.03.80 : (event code) Yellow cartridge Recommended action Replace the empty cartridge or cartridges indicated in the error message. Ink Sensor Failure Description The product ink sensor has failed and the product no longer prints. ● 17.00.42 : (event code) Black cartridge ● 17.01.42 : (event code) Cyan cartridge ● 17.02.42 : (event code) Magenta cartridge ● 17.03.42 : (event code) Yellow cartridge 128 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action The product ink sensor has failed and the product no longer prints. 1. Turn the product off and then on. 2. Replace cartridge. 3. Replace mech kit. Install Description The indicated cartridge is not installed, missing or has a damaged acumen. ● 17.00.65 : (event code) Black cartridge ● 17.01.65 : (event code) Cyan cartridge ● 17.02.65 : (event code) Magenta cartridge ● 17.03.65 : (event code) Yellow cartridge Recommended action Install the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated. Internal disk device failure To clear touch “OK” Description 82.0X.YY (event code) The internal disk failed. Recommended action 1. Touch the OK button to clear the error. 2. If the error persists, turn off the product, and then remove and reinstall the hard drive. 3. Turn on the product. 4. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive. Internal disk file operation failed Description A PJL system command attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 129 Internal disk file system is full Description A PJL system command attempted to write data to the internal disk, but failed because the disk is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Internal disk is write protected Description The internal disk is write protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Internal disk not found Description The internal disk was not found at start up. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Internal disk not functional Description 82.0X.YY (event code) The internal hard drive is not functioning correctly. Recommended action 1. Turn off the product, and then remove and reinstall the hard drive. 2. Turn on the product. 3. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive. Internal disk not initialized Description The file system on the internal disk must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Initialize the file system on the internal disk. Internal disk spinning up Description The internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait. 130 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action is necessary. Jam in document feeder Description A document feeder jam has occurred. Recommended action Clear the jam. Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use another tray, press “OK” Description This message displays when the indicated tray is selected, but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. It also displays when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires. Recommended action 1. Load the correct paper in the tray. 2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. 3. Otherwise, press the OK button to select another tray. 4. If error persists, use the cassette media present sensor test in the tray/bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is functioning correctly. 5. Make sure that the sensor flag on the media presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Loading program Description Programs and fonts can be stored on the product’s file system and are loaded into RAM when the product is turned on. The number specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded. Recommended action No action necessary. NOTE: Do not turn the product off. Turning the product off might cause a corruption of the files loading. Low on ink Description The ink level in the indicated cartridge has reached a low level. ENWW ● 17.00.60 : (event code) Black cartridge ● 17.01.60 : (event code) Cyan cartridge Tools for troubleshooting 131 ● 17.02.60 : (event code) Magenta cartridge ● 17.03.60 : (event code) Yellow cartridge Recommended action It is not necessary to replace the cartridge at this point. HP recommends having a replacement cartridge ready for when the cartridge is empty. Main Tray 2 Missing or Open Description The product cannot detect the tray. Recommended action Install and close the tray. Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second side Description The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side. Recommended action 1. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the pages from the output bin. 2. Flip the document printed side up. 3. Load the document in Tray 1. 4. Touch the OK button to print the second side of the job. Manually feed: To use another tray, press “OK” Description This message displays when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is loaded, and other trays are available. Recommended action 1. Load tray with the requested paper. 2. If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message, and then press the OK button to print. 3. To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message, and then press the OK button. No job to cancel Description The user pressed the “Stop” button, but the product is not actively processing any jobs. 132 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary. Non-HP Cartridge(s) Non-HP ink cartridges installed Description The product has detected a non-HP cartridge or cartridges ● 17.00.34 : (event code) Black cartridge ● 17.01.34 : (event code) Cyan cartridge ● 17.02.34 : (event code) Magenta cartridge ● 17.03.34 : (event code) Yellow cartridge Recommended action Press OK to continue. HP cannot guarantee the quality or reliability of non-HP supplies. Replace the cartridges with HP cartridges to ensure the best print quality. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. Output Bin Full Description The output bin is full or this message displays even though the output bin is not full. Recommended action 1. Clear all media from the output bin. 2. Check that the face-down tray media-full sensor flag to move smoothly. If the flag is damaged, replace the face-down delivery assembly 3. Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the face-down tray media-full sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the face-down delivery assembly. Paper Jam in Automatic Document Feeder Description The product has detected a jam in the document feeder. Recommended action Clear the jam and then touch the OK button. Paper Jam Paper Jam Description The product has experienced a paper jam. Printing cannot continue until the jam has been cleared. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 133 Recommended action Follow the instructions on the product control panel to clear the jam. Paper too short Paper too short Description The product cannot print on paper smaller than 12.5 cm (4.9 in) in length. Recommended action Load paper that exceeds the product minimum supported size and re-send the print job. Paper too short to autoduplex Description The paper in the product does not meet the minimum size requirements for automatic two sided printing (duplexing). Recommended action Load paper that meets specifications for automatic duplexing. Paper type mismatch Description The paper type detected by the product does not match the type selected in the software. Recommended action Select the correct type in the software, load the type dictated by the software, or touch the OK button to continue the job with the size mismatch. Paused... Description The product is paused and there are no error messages pending at the display. The I/O continues receiving data until memory is full. Recommended action Press the Stop button. Performing Paper Path Test… Description The product is performing a paper-path test. Recommended action No action necessary. 134 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Please Wait... Description The product is in the process of clearing data. Recommended action No action necessary. Print head Jam Description The product has detected a jam that is blocking the print head. Recommended action Follow the instructions on the product control panel to clear the jam. Printer Failure Description The product or ink system has experienced an error. Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Printer Supply Upgrade Description The indicated supply upgrade was detected. ● 17.00.52 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.52 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.52 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.52 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action Press the OK button or touch the Upgrade button to install the upgrade cartridge, or replace the cartridge. Printer Supply Upgrade Problem Description The indicated supply encountered an upgrade problem. ENWW ● 17.00.54 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.54 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.54 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.54 — Yellow Cartridge Tools for troubleshooting 135 Recommended action Replace the ink cartridge. Printing Configuration... Description The product is printing the Configuration page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Event Log... Description The product is printing the Event Log page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing File Directory... Description The product is printing the File Directory pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Font List... Description The product is printing the Font List pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Help Page... Description The product is printing the Help page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Menu Map... Description The product is printing the Menu Map pages. 136 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary. Printing stopped Description Time expired on the Print/Stop test. Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue. Printing Supplies Status Page... Description The product is printing the Supplies Status page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Usage Page... Description The product is printing the Usage page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing…engine test Description The product is printing an Engine test page. Recommended action No action necessary. Problem with Printer Preparation Description The product has detected an error with the product clock. Print quality can be affected. Recommended action Run a cleaning page through the product. Problem with startup Cartridge(s) Description The product has detected a problem with the startup cartridges, which prevents the product from completing the initialization process during initial installation. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 137 Recommended action Replace the cartridges. Processing job from tray ...Do not grab paper until job completes Description The product is actively processing a job from the designated tray. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing... Description The product is currently processing a job, but is not yet picking pages. When paper motion begins, this message is replaced by a message that indicates the tray the job is using. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing...copy of Description The product is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy number of total copies is currently being processed. Recommended action No action necessary. RAM disk device failure To clear touch “OK” Description The specified device failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. RAM disk file operation failed To clear touch “OK” Description A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. 138 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW RAM disk file system is full To clear touch “OK” Description The hard disk is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. RAM disk is write protected To clear touch “OK” Description The RAM device is write protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. RAM disk not initialized Description The file system on the RAM disk must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Initialize the file system on the RAM disk. Ready Description The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display. Recommended action No action necessary. Ready Description The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display. The product IP address displays. Recommended action No action necessary. Receiving Upgrade Description The product is receiving a firmware upgrade. Recommended action Do not turn the product off until it reaches the Ready state. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 139 Turning the product off might cause a corruption of the upgrade file. Remove USB accessory Description This message displays when an unsupported USB device is inserted into a host USB port on the product. Recommended action Remove the unsupported USB device. Resend Upgrade Description A firmware upgrade did not complete successfully. Recommended action Upgrade the firmware again. Restore Factory Settings Description The product is restoring factory settings. Recommended action No action necessary. ROM disk device failed To clear touch “OK” Description The specified device failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch “OK” Description A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk file system is full To clear touch “OK” Description The hard disk is full. 140 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk is write protected To clear touch “OK” Description The ROM device is write protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk not initialized To clear touch “OK” Description The file system on the ROM disk must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Initialize the file system on the ROM disk. Service Ink Capacity Warning Description The waste ink container on the duplex module is full or almost full. This can cause print quality issues (smearing). Recommended action Replace the duplex module, and then reset the service ink detection mechanism. 1. Open the Administration menu on control panel. 2. Select Manage Supplies. 3. Select Reset Supplies. 4. Select New Ink Collection Unit and then touch the OK button Size mismatch in Tray Description The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray. Recommended action ENWW 1. Load the correct paper. 2. Make sure that the paper is positioned correctly. 3. Close the tray, and then make sure that the control panel lists the correct size and type for the specified tray. Tools for troubleshooting 141 4. If necessary, use the control panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the specified tray. 5. If error persists, use the tray/bin manual sensor test to test the switch. Sleep mode on Description The product is in sleep mode. Pressing a control panel button, receiving of a print job, or an error condition clears this message. Recommended action No action necessary. Startup Routine Ink Alert Description The cartridge indicated might not have enough ink to complete the product startup process. ● 17.00.36 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.36 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.36 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.36 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action Replace the cartridge indicated in the error message. The unit has corrupt data Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume. ● 98.00.01: Corrupt data in the firmware volume ● 98.00.02: Corrupt data in the solutions volume ● 98.00.03: Corrupt data in the configuration volume ● 98.00.04: Corrupt data in the job data volume Recommended action For 98.00.01, 98.00.02, and 98.00.03, perform the following steps: 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. For 98.00.04, perform the following steps: 142 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Run the file erase function. Tray [type] [size] Description The media in the specified tray is detected as the specified size and type. The custom switch was not changed. Recommended action If the media is a custom size or type, change the custom switch accordingly. Tray empty: [Type], [Size] / Tray X Out of Paper Description The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print. ● X = 1: Tray 1 ● X = 2: Tray 2 ● X = 3: Tray 3 Recommended action Refill the tray at a convenient time. This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray. Tray lifting Description The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray. ● X = 2: Tray 2 ● X = 3: Tray 3 Recommended action No action necessary. Tray open Description The specified tray is open or not closed completely. ENWW ● X = 2: Tray 2 ● X = 3: Tray 3 Tools for troubleshooting 143 Recommended action 1. Close the tray. 2. If this message displays after the lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector of the assembly is connected correctly and fully seated. 3. If the error persists, use the media size switches in the tray/bin manual sensor test to test the switches. 4. If the switches do not respond, replace the associated lifter drive assembly. Type mismatch Tray Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type. Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other trays. 1. Load the correct paper in the specified tray. 2. On the product control, make sure that the type loaded in the tray matches the specified setting for the tray. Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch “OK” Description A non-supported hard drive has been installed. The drive is unusable by this product. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the hard drive. 3. Turn the product on. Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description A non-supported supply has been installed or the ink cartridge is for a different product. Recommended action Install the correct supplies for this product. See the parts chapter in the service manual for supply part numbers. Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non-supported USB accessory has been connected. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on. 144 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Upgrade Error Description SCB upgrade error has occurred. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Resend the upgrade. 3. If the error persists, replace the SCB. USB accessory not functional Description A parameter in the USB accessory is not functioning correctly. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the USB accessory. 3. Insert the USB accessory making sure it is fully seated and connected properly. 4. Turn the product on. 5. If issue remains, replace the USB accessory. USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly Description Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available. Recommended action Remove the USB hub. USB is write protected To clear touch “OK” Description The USB device is write protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. USB needs too much power Description Power requirements for the USB device attached to the product are beyond supported limits. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 145 Recommended action 1. Remove the USB device. 2. Turn the product off, and then on. 3. Try a similar accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power. USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off then On Description A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current. Printing cannot continue. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the USB accessory. 3. Turn the product on. 4. Try a similar USB accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power. USB not initialized Description The file system on the USB device must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the USB device. USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data Description This message displays for about 6 seconds after a USB device is removed. Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message. USB storage device failure To clear touch “OK” Description The specified device failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error. USB storage file operation failed To clear touch “OK” Description A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an invalid operation, such as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory. 146 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error. USB storage file system is full To clear touch “OK” Description The file system on the installed USB device is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error. Use startup cartridges Description The product needs the startup ink cartridges that came with the product to perform the initial startup process. Recommended action Replace the cartridges with the startup ink cartridges that came with the product. Used HP Ink Cartridge(s) installed Description The product has detected a used cartridge or cartridges. Recommended action Press or touch the OK button to clear the message. Used or Counterfeit Cartridge Detected Description The supply being used is either a counterfeit or refilled cartridge. ● 17.00.34 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.34 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.34 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.34 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action At the computer, click Yes or No to clear the message. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit . Any print quality repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty. Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 147 Very Low on Ink Description The ink level in the indicated cartridge has reached a very low level. ● 17.00.69 — Black Cartridge ● 17.01.69 — Cyan Cartridge ● 17.02.69 — Magenta Cartridge ● 17.03.69 — Yellow Cartridge Recommended action It is not necessary to replace the cartridge at this point. HP recommends having a replacement cartridge ready for when the cartridge is empty. Windows Login Required to Use this Feature Description Windows login is required for the selected feature or job. Recommended action Enter the necessary Windows login information. 148 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Individual component diagnostics LED diagnostics Understand lights on the formatter The LEDS on the formatter indicate basic product functionality and may be used for troubleshooting. Figure 2-9 LEDs 1 1 HP Jetdirect LEDs 2 Connectivity LED 3 Heartbeat LED 2 3 Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED provides information about product operation. If a product error occurs, the formatter displays a message on the control-panel display. However, error situations can occur causing the formatter to control panel communication to be interrupted. NOTE: HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly. Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies. The heartbeat LED operates according to the product state. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 149 Table 2-4 Heartbeat LED status LED color Description Green ● Solid—During part of boot up initialization and Pre-boot menu ● Slow blinking—During normal operation/sleep mode Yellow ● ● Red Off ◦ Formatter is operating normally ◦ Firmware is operating normally ◦ Control panel is connected Fast blinking—Formatter cannot connect to the control panel ◦ Check control panel connections ◦ Verify control panel functionality Solid—Formatter error or failure (initially red for one second during power on) ◦ Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error ◦ Power on self test (formatter) failed ◦ Diagnostic (formatter) failed The power cable is disconnected, or the product power switch is in the off position. ● Firmware or system freeze. Reboot the product, or reload or upgrade the firmware ◦ Check control panel for an error message ◦ Control panel failure or the product power switch is in the off position NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade. Connectivity LED If the connectivity LED is solid green, it indicates that the formatter assembly is correctly plugged in and powered up. TIP: If the connectivity LED is illuminated, the formatter is fully seated and the power is on. The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated. HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: 150 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 3. ● Network Settings ● Embedded Jetdirect ● Link Speed Select the appropriate link speed, and then touch the OK button. Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature: ● Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test. ● Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray. ● Test Duplex Path: Enable or disable two-sided printing. ● Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the range is 1-500. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: 3. ENWW ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Paper Path Test Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run. Tools for troubleshooting 151 Scanner tests (X585 only) Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors. Scanner tests This section lists the sensors available in the Scanner Tests. Use the scanner tests The Scanner Tests screen shows the sensor name, sensor state (active or inactive), and the number of times the sensor has been toggled (activated). 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests ● Sensors 3. Touch the sensor name on the Scanner Tests screen to display a sensor location graphic on the controlpanel display. 4. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state (active or inactive). ● The State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the sensor is active. ● The Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the sensor is activated and increments by one each time the sensor is interrupted (activated or deactivated). For example, opening and closing the flatbed cover increments the Flatbed Cover Toggle item count two times—once when the door is opened, and once when the door is closed. 5. Touch the Reset Sensors button to reset the Toggle count item. -orTouch the Cancel button to exit the Scanner Tests screen, and then touch the Cancel button again to return to the Diagnostic Tests menu. Scanner sensor tests ● ADF Paper Present ● ADF Y (length) ● ADF Jam Cover ● ADF Paper Path Deskew ● ADF Paper Path Pick Success 152 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW ● Paper path sensor 1 (unreachable) ● Paper path sensor 2 (unreachable) ● Flatbed Y (length) ● Flatbed cover Tools for troubleshooting 153 Diagrams For diagrams showing sensors and other components, see the Theory of Operations chapter. Plug/jack locations Figure 2-10 Plug/jack locations (X555) 1 2 3 Table 2-5 Plug/jack locations (X555) Item Description 1 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port 2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port 3 USB port for connecting external USB devices 154 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2-11 Plug/jack locations (X585) 1 2 3 4 5 Table 2-6 Plug/jack locations (X585) ENWW Item Description 1 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port 2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port 3 Foreign interface harness (for connecting third-party devices) 4 USB port for connecting external USB devices 5 Fax port (fax models only) Tools for troubleshooting 155 Print-quality troubleshooting tools Internal print-quality test pages Print-quality troubleshooting pages Use the print-quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems. NOTE: To get further assistance in print-quality troubleshooting, go to www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 or www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585 and select PQ Troubleshooting Tools. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Troubleshooting ● Print Quality Pages Select one of the following documents to print: ● Troubleshooting Guide ● Diagnostic Page ● Print Quality Report ● Print Quality Service Pages ● Printhead Diagnostic Pages Interpret the print quality report 1. Load the product with regular, unused white paper. 2. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Administration button. 3. Open the following menus: 4. ● Troubleshooting ● Print Quality Pages Select the Print Quality Report item to print it. This page contains four bands of color, which are divided into the groups as indicated in the following illustration. By examining each group, you can isolate the problem to a particular ink cartridge. 156 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 1 2 3 4 Section Ink cartridge 1 Black 2 Cyan 3 Magenta 4 Yellow TIP: Mark this page with a “1” in a corner. If you clean the printhead later, you will want to keep track of which page was printed first, in order to note any progress. In general, if the ink system is working correctly, all the color bars are present and not streaked. Each bar has three distinct shades, but otherwise the color should not vary across the bar. The bars should also be evenly lined up. The black text on the page should not show ink streaks. The following table shows some representative examples of defects on the print quality report. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 157 Defect Color variation across bar Example Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Color intensity variation across bars Black Cyan Magenta Yellow 158 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Defect Uneven bars Example Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Vertical dark lines Black Cyan Magenta Yellow ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 159 Defect Vertical white lines on all bars Example Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Vertical white lines on select bars Black Cyan Magenta Yellow 160 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Defect Shade gradations not sharp Example Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Page is blank or only partially printed Print Quality Printhead Cleaning Diagnostic XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 1 0 Black Cyan Magenta Yellow 1 ENWW | 2 Tools for troubleshooting 161 If the print quality report shows defects like the ones above, clean the printhead as follows: 1. Load the product with regular, unused white paper. 2. On the control panel, touch the Device Maintenance button. 3. Open the Calibration/Cleaning menu. 4. Select the Printhead Cleaning item. The cleaning process has several steps. After each of them, the product prints the print quality report again. Evaluate each of these pages to determine if the original defect has been fixed – if it has, there is no reason to go on to the next cleaning stage. TIP: Number each of the print quality pages so you don’t lose track of the prints later. 5. If you finish the cleaning process and still see defects on the print quality report, retry cleaning, especially if you have seen improvement in the print quality reports. 6. If the print quality report still shows defects after a second cleaning, go to the next section to service the product. If the defect on the print quality report is color variation across the bars (see the table of defects above), and if the problem seems to go away after a cleaning, but then reoccurs in the same location on the color bar the next day, complete the following procedure: 1. 2. Check to see if any of the following conditions are true: ● Prior to the print quality problem, the product was unused for more than three weeks. ● The product was recently moved or experienced a large temperature shift. ● There was a recent paper jam. ● The print quality problem seems to be getting better as the product is used (especially if print jobs with dense backgrounds are printed). If none of the conditions above are true, the color problem is likely to reoccur, even if a cleaning fixes it temporarily. Go to the final section of this document to service the product. If the print quality report has no defects, then the ink system is working correctly. There is no reason to clean the printhead, which unnecessarily wastes ink and paper. Complete the following steps: 1. Retry the original print job. Just printing the print quality report can solve some problems. If the print job meets print quality standards, stop troubleshooting here. 2. If problems still exist on print jobs, review the earlier steps in this document: make sure the ink and paper are appropriate, and that the print settings are correct. In addition, these suggestions may help with some problems: ● If you are printing an image, make sure it has sufficient resolution. Images that have been enlarged too much might appear fuzzy or blurry. ● If the problem is confined to a band near the edge of a printout, use the software you installed with the product or another software program to rotate the image 180°. The problem might not appear on the other end of the printout. ● Always use the power button to turn the product off. This protects the printhead from exposure to air. 162 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ● If yellow is missing from color jobs, there might be an ink sludge buildup on the orifice plate. Clean the printhead several times and then see if print quality has improved. ● If all colors are experiencing poor print quality, there might be an issue with the web wipe not advancing. Open the left door, and then mark the edge of the web wipe above the duplex module. Figure 2-12 Mark the web wipe Run the product so that it performs a wipe, and then see if the web has advanced. If it has not, replace the print mechanism. 3. ENWW If the problem persists, contact HP to service the product. Tools for troubleshooting 163 Cleaning page 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Open the following menus: 3. ● Calibration/Cleaning ● Resolve Ink Smear Touch the Start button to begin the procedure. The cleaning process can take several minutes. Calibrate the product to align the colors Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality problems, calibrate the product. 1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. 2. Open the following menus: ● Calibration/Cleaning ● Advanced Calibration Support (and then touch Continue) ● Color Density Calibration 3. Touch the Continue button to start the calibration process. 4. Wait while the product calibrates, and then try printing again. Preboot menu options If an error occurs while the product is initializing, an error message displays on the control-panel display. The user can open the Preboot menus. The error menu item will not be seen if an error did not occur. CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action. Open the Preboot menu 1. Turn the product on. 2. The HP logo displays on the product control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays below the HP logo, touch the logo to open the Preboot menu. TIP: You can also wait for the HP logo to move to the center of the control-panel display, and then touch the logo to open the Preboot menu. 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Preboot menu. 4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item. 164 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Cold reset using the Preboot menu 1. Turn the product on. 2. The HP logo displays on the product control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays below the HP logo, touch the logo to open the Preboot menu. 3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Administrator item, and then touch the OK button. 4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button. 5. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button. 6. Touch the Home button to highlight the Continue item, and then touch the OK button. NOTE: The product will initialize. Table 2-7 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) Menu option Continue First level Second level Third level Description Selecting the Continue item exits the Preboot menu and continues the normal boot process. If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds, the product returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting Continue). If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not apply. Sign In ENWW Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to open the Preboot menu. Tools for troubleshooting 165 Table 2-7 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Third level Description This item navigates to the Administrator submenus. If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to sign in. Download Network USB This item initiates a preboot firmware download process. A USB thumb drive option will work on all FutureSmart products. USB or network connections are not currently supported. USB Thumbdrive Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions. CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data. A delete confirmation prompt is not provided. The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A firmware download must be performed to return the system to a bootable state. Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is downloaded and saved). CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt is not provided. This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the firmware image from the active directory without having to download new firmware code (product remains bootable). Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password. Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the action. When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button to clear the password. 166 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-8 Preboot menu options (2 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Third level Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Select the Clear Disk item to disable using an external device for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed. LockDisk Select the LockDisk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to this product. continued Description The secure disk already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product. Use this function to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by the product when using them interchangeably. The data stored on the secure disk locked to this product always remains accessible to this product. Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk that is already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk's encryption password with the new disk. The secure disk that is already locked to this product remains accessible to this product. Clear Disk Password Select the Clear Disk Password item to continue using the nonsecure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-tobe installed secure disk. CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be permanently inaccessible. Retain Password Boot Device Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk in future sessions. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required. This might take a long time. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status ENWW This item provides disk status information if any is available. Tools for troubleshooting 167 Table 2-9 Preboot menu options (3 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device continued continued Third level Description Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or get a status about the internal device. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required. This might take a long time. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased. Get Status External Device This item provides disk status information if any is available. Select the External Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required. This might take a long time. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status 168 Chapter 2 Solve problems This item provides disk status information if any is available. ENWW Table 2-10 Preboot menu options (4 of 6) Menu option First level Administrator Configure LAN Second level Third level Description Select the Configure LAN item to set up the network settings for the Preboot menu firmware upgrade. continued The network can be configured to obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static. IP Mode DHCP Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the DHCP server. IP Mode Static Use this item to manually assign the network addresses. IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses. Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask. Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway. Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings. Table 2-11 Preboot menu options (5 of 6) Menu option First level Administrator Startup Options continued Second level Third level Description Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can be set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to the Ready state. Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version when the product reaches the Ready state. Once the product power is turned on the next time, the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is not shown. Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to factory defaults.) NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset. Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-party applications. Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to initialize the product the next time the power is turned on without calibrating. Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service menu access (both in the Preboot menu and the Device Maintenance menu). Service personnel must have the administrator remove the Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu. Skip FSCK ENWW Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume during startup. Tools for troubleshooting 169 Table 2-11 Preboot menu options (5 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Startup Options First Power continued Third level Description Not currently functional: This item allows the product to initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on. continued For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time settings like date/time, language, and other settings. Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the product power is turned on. When the product power is turned on the next time, this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not used. Embedded Jetdirect Off Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the embedded HP Jetdirect. By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is always enabled. Wifi Accessory Select the Wifi Accessory item to enable the wireless accessory. Table 2-12 Preboot menu options (6 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Diagnostic items are useful for troubleshooting formatter problems. Use the options below the Do Not Run item to help troubleshoot formatter problems. continued Short Long Disk Do Not Run Short Long Optimized RAW Smart ICB CPB Interconnect Run Selected Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to gain access to the product remotely to troubleshoot issues. Stop Telnet Refresh IP 170 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-12 Preboot menu options (6 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level System Triage Copy Logs Service Tools Developer Tools Third level Description If you cannot print the error logs, the System Triage item allows you to copy the error logs to a flash drive on the next startup. The files can then be sent to HP to help determine the problem. This item requires the service access personal identification number (PIN) for this product (see the service mode functions section in the product troubleshooting manual). If the product does not reach the Ready state, you can use this item to print the error logs. The logs can be copied to a USB drive when the product is initialized, and then these files can be sent to HP to help determine what is causing the problem. Reset Password Use this item to reset the administrator password. Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values. Net Exec This item is for factory use only. WARNING! HP recommends that field service personnel do not access, or use this item. This item is for factory use only. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 171 Control-panel menus Administration menu You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser. Reports menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Reports menu. Table 2-13 Reports menu First level Second level Values Description Configuration/Status Pages Administration Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire Administration menu and the selected values for each setting. View Current Settings Page Print View Configuration Page Print View How to Connect Page Print View Supplies Status Page Print View Shows a summary of the current settings for the product. This might be helpful if you plan to make changes and need a record of the present configuration. Shows the product settings and installed accessories. Shows the network information typically needed to connect the product to a network. Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information. HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different from the approximations provided. Usage Page Print View File Directory Print View Web Services Status Page Print View 172 Chapter 2 Solve problems Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count. Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in the product memory. Shows the detected Web Services for the product. ENWW Table 2-13 Reports menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed by the product. View Fax Reports (X585 only) Fax Activity Log Print View Billing Codes Report Print View Blocked Fax List Print View Speed Dial List Print View Fax Call Report Print View Other Pages ENWW Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this product. Provides a list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code. A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this product. Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this product. A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received. Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page. RGB samples Print Prints color samples for different RGB values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors. CMYK samples Print Prints color samples for different CMYK values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors. PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts. PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts. Control-panel menus 173 General Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-14 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format Fourth level Values Description DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time Settings menu to specify the date and time and to configure date/time settings. MMM/DD/YYYY YYYY/MMM/DD Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) 24 hours Date/Time 174 Chapter 2 Solve problems Time Zone Select the time zone from a list. Date Select the date from a pop-up calendar. Time Select the time from a pop-up keypad. Adjust for Daylight Savings (Checkbox) Select the format that the product uses to show the date and time, for example 12hour format or 24hour format. Select the time zone, date, and time that the product uses. If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time, select the Adjust for Daylight Savings box. ENWW Table 2-14 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled events displays. Fourth level Values Description + (Add) Use to configure the product to automatically wake up or go to sleep at specific times on specific days. Using this feature saves energy. Edit Delete NOTE: You must configure the date and time settings before you can use this feature. Event Type Select whether to add or edit a Wake event or a Sleep event, and then select the time and the days for the wake or sleep event. Time Set the wake or sleep event time parameters. Event Days Sleep Timer Settings Sleep/Auto Off After Select days of the week from a list. Set the wake or sleep event day parameters. Range: 1 to 120 minutes Set the number of minutes after which the product enters Sleep or Auto Off mode. Touch the existing number to open the virtual keypad, and then increase or decrease the number of minutes. Default = 60 minutes Wake/Auto On to These Events All Events* Network port Power button only ENWW Control-panel menus 175 Table 2-14 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Quality Image Registration Adjust Tray X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back. Y1 Shift X2 Shift Y2 Shift The direction that is perpendicular to the way the paper passes through the product is referred to as X. This is also known as the scan direction. X1 is the scan direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a two-sided page. X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a two-sided page. The direction that the paper feeds through the product is referred to as Y. Y1 is the feed direction for a singlesided page or for the second side of a twosided page. Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a twosided page. Use the Adjust Tray menu to adjust the registration settings for each tray. Before adjusting these values, print a registration test page. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary. You can adjust values for X1 Shift, X2 Shift, Y1 Shift, and Y2 Shift. 176 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-14 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Print Test Page Jam Recovery Description Use the Print Test Page option to print a page to test the image registration. It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary. Auto* Off On This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. Select one of the following options: Auto: The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting. Off: The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. On: The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause a decrease in overall performance. Auto Recovery Enabled Disabled* Manage Stored Jobs ENWW General Stored Job Settings Sort Stored Jobs By Job Name* Date The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting. This option allows you list the jobs either alphabetically or chronologically. Control-panel menus 177 Table 2-14 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Default Folder Name Temporary Stored Job Settings Retain Temporary Jobs After Reboot Type the name for the stored jobs folder that is accessible to all users. Do not retain Personal jobs only All temporary jobs Delete Temporary Jobs After Description Off* 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day Sets which temporary jobs will be retained in the event of a product reboot. Sets a maximum storage-time limit for stored Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs. If a stored job is not printed during this period, it is deleted. 1 Week Temporary Job Storage Limit 1-300 Default = 32 Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the product memory. The Temporary Job Storage Limit feature specifies the number of temporary jobs that can be stored on the product. The maximum allowed value is 300. Enable Retrieve from USB Enabled Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Disabled* Disabled Restore Factory Settings 178 Chapter 2 Solve problems Restore Cancel Enables the product to open a file from a USB drive. Enable this feature if you want to prevent print jobs from starting while a user is initiating a copy job from the control panel. Held print jobs start printing after the copy job is finished, provided that no other copy job is in the print queue. Use to restore all product settings to their factory defaults. ENWW Copy Settings menu (X585 only) To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Copy Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) First level Second level Third level Copies Values Description 1–9999 Configure the default options for copy jobs. If the user does not specify the job options when creating the job, the default options are used. Default = 1 Sides 1-sided original, 1-sided output* 2-sided original, 2-sided output 1-sided original, 2-sided output 2-sided original, 1-sided output Orientation Portrait* Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides. For example, select 1-sided original, 2- sided output when the original is printed on one side, but you want to make two-sided copies. Specify portrait or landscape orientation and select the way the second sides are printed. Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape ENWW Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top. Control-panel menus 179 Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style If you are making twosided copies, select a 2sided format option. Flip-style Book-style original; Flipstyle copy Flip-style original; Bookstyle copy Book-style: The back side of the original is printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge. Flip-style: The back side of the original is printed upside-down, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge. Book-style original; Flipstyle copy: The back side of the original is printed rightside-up, but the back side of the copy is printed upside-down. Use this option when the original is bound along the left edge, but you want the copies to be bound along the top edge. Flip-style original; Bookstyle copy: The back side of the original is printed upside-down, but the back side of the copy is printed right-side-up. Use this option when the original is bound along the top edge, but you want the copies to be bound along the left edge. 180 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Color/Black Third level Values Description Automatically detect* Select how the copy should be printed. Color Black Automatically detect: Prints color documents in color, and black and white documents in black and white. For mixed documents, the product will determine whether to print in color or black and white. Color: Prints documents in color. Black: Prints documents in black and white. Collate Collate on (Sets in page order)* Collate off (Pages grouped) If you are making more than one copy, select the Collate on (Sets in page order) option to assemble the pages in the correct order in each set of copies. Select the Collate off (Pages grouped) option to group the same pages together. For example, if you are making five copies of an original document that has two pages, all five first pages would be grouped together and all five second pages would be grouped together. Reduce/Enlarge Scaling Auto* 100% 75% 50% 125% 150% 200% Auto Include Margins ENWW Use to scale the size of the document up or down. Select one of the predefined percentages, or select the Scaling field and type a percentage between 25 and 400. The Auto option automatically scales the image to fit the paper size in the tray. NOTE: To reduce the image, select a scaling percentage that is less than 100. To enlarge the image, select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100. The product reduces the image slightly to fit the entire scanned image within the printable area on the page. Control-panel menus 181 Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Paper Selection Third level Values Description Manually feed For the best color and image quality, select the appropriate paper type from the control panel menu or from the print driver. Automatically select Tray 1: [Type], [Size] Tray : [Type], [Size] Image Adjustment Darkness Select a value using the slide bar, or touch Automatic. Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Contrast Select a value using the slide bar, or touch Automatic. Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page. Background Cleanup Select a value using the slide bar, or touch Automatic. Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image. Sharpness Select a value using the slide bar, or touch Automatic. Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother. Default Content Orientation Orientation Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value. Portrait* Landscape Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* 182 Chapter 2 Solve problems Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. Optimize For slider For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top. Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content. ENWW Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Text Manually Adjust: Use to manually optimize the setting for each document. Printed picture Photograph Printed picture: Use for line drawings and preprinted images, such as magazine clippings or pages from books. If you see bands of irregular color or intensity on copies, try selecting the Printed picture setting to improve the quality. Photograph: Use for photographic prints. Pages per Sheet One (1) Two (2) Four (4) Page Order Right, then down Down, then right Add Page Borders Booklet Format Borders on Each Page ENWW NOTE: Before using this screen, use the Content Orientation screen to describe the original document orientation. If you are printing four pages per sheet, select the page order. To print the pages in rows, select the Right, then down option. To print the pages in columns, select the Down, then right option. If you are printing two or more pages per sheet and you want to print a border around each page, select the Add Page Borders option. Original Size Booklet Copies multiple pages onto one sheet of paper. Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Describes the page size of the original document. (Checkbox) Use to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet. The product arranges the pages in the correct order. For example, if the original document has eight pages, the product prints pages 1 and 8 on the same sheet. (Checkbox) To print a border around each page, select the Borders on Each Page option. Control-panel menus 183 Table 2-15 Copy Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Original Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Describes the page size of the original document. Sides 1-sided Select the 1-sided option if the original document is printed on only one side. 2-sided Select the 2-sided option if the original document is printed on two sides. Paper Selection Manually feed Automatic Tray 1: [Type], [Size] Tray : [Type], [Size] Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Edge-to-Edge output Job Build Job Build off* Job Build on Multi-feed Detection Enabled* Disabled 2–sided ID Scan ID Scan on ID Scan off* Book Mode Book Mode on Book Mode off* 184 Chapter 2 Solve problems For the best color and image quality, select the appropriate paper type from the control panel menu or from the print driver. Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges. Combine with the Reduce/Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies. When the Edge-toEdge feature is turned on, the product minimizes margins and prints as close to the edge of the paper as possible. Use to combine several original documents into one job. Also use this feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time. The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. After you have scanned all the pages for the job, touch the Finish option to finish the job. This setting stops the scanning process if it detects multiple-page feeds through the document feeder. ID Scan mode allows the user to scan both sides of an identification card onto one sheet. This setting allows the user to scan pages from a book. ENWW Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) First level Second level E-mail Settings E-mail Setup Wizard Save to Network Folder Options NOTE: Email Settings only Save to USB Options NOTE: The same options are available for each of these features, except where noted. ENWW Third level Fourth level Values Description Use to configure settings that apply to sending documents through email or saving documents to a folder on the network or on a USB multidrive. The E-mail Setup Wizard feature configures the product to send scanned images as email attachments. To open the product HP Embedded Web Server and set up the email notification server, enter the product IP address into a Web browser. Control-panel menus 185 Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Default Job Options Image Preview Fourth level Values Description Make optional* Defines the default job options for each function. If you do not specify the job options when creating the job, the default options are used. For complete setup, go to the HP Embedded Web Server by typing the IP address of the product into a Web browser. Require preview Disable preview Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job. Select whether this feature is available on the product. Make optional: The feature is optional, depending on the user who is signed in. Require preview Previews are required for all users. Disable preview: Previews are disabled for all users. Default File Name 186 Chapter 2 Solve problems The product is shipped with a factory default file name of [Untitled] for any scanned files that are sent or saved. Use this feature to specify a different default file name. If you are saving a file to a network folder or USB storage product and a file with the default file name already exists, a number is appended to the file name, for example, [Untitled]001. ENWW Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Document File Type Fourth level Values Description Select from a list of file types. PDF provides the best overall image and text quality. JPEG is a good choice for most graphics. Most computers have a browser that can view .JPEG files. This file type produces one file per page. TIFF is a standard file format that many graphics programs support. This file type produces one file per page. MTIFF: stands for multi-page TIFF. This file type saves multiple scanned pages in a single file. XPS (XML Paper Specification) creates an XML file that preserves the original formatting of the document and supports color graphics and embedded fonts. NOTE: OCR file types are not supported on this product unless attached to DSS. ENWW Control-panel menus 187 Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Optimize Text/Picture Fourth level Values Description Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed pictures, or a mixture. Text Printed picture Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures. Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and/or pictures are on the original. Printed picture: Use for line drawings and preprinted images, such as magazine clippings or pages from books. Photograph: Best suited for making copies of printed pictures. Output Quality High (large file) Medium* Low (small file) Original Sides 1-sided 2-sided 188 Chapter 2 Solve problems Use to select the quality for the output. Higher-quality images require a larger file size than lowerquality images. Larger files take more time to send, and some recipients might have trouble receiving larger files. Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation. If it is printed on both sides, also select the 2-sided format that matches the original document. ENWW Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Orientation Automatically detect For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top. In the Orientation area, select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation. Portrait* Landscape 2-Sided Format Book-style Flip-style Book-style: The back side of the original is printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge. Flip-style: The back side of the original is printed upside-down, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge. ENWW Control-panel menus 189 Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Resolution Values Description 400 dpi Sets the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file size is smaller. Some file types, for example a file that will be processed with OCR, require a specific resolution. When these file types are selected, the Resolution setting might automatically change to a valid value. 300 dpi 200 dpi 150 dpi* 75 dpi Content Orientation Orientation Auto Detect Portrait* Landscape 2-Sided Format Book-style* Flip-style 190 Chapter 2 Solve problems For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top. In the Orientation area, select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation. Use to configure the default style for 2sided print jobs. If the Book-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If the Flip-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed upsidedown. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge. ENWW Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Color/Black Values Description Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color scanning. Color Black/Gray Automatically detect: Automatically scans documents in color if at least one page has color. Black Color: Scans documents in color. Black/Gray: Scans documents in grayscale. Black: Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size. Original Size Select from a list of supported sizes. Use to describe the page size of the original document. Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document. Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Print E-mail Do not notify: Turns off this feature. Notify when job completes: Select to receive notification for this job only. Notify only if job fails: Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully. Print: Select to print the notification at this product. E-mail: Select to recieve the notification to an email account. Include Thumbnail ENWW NOTE: When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification. Control-panel menus 191 Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Image Adjustment Fourth level Values Description Notification E-mail address E-mail: Select to receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following Email Address, and then type the email address for the notification. Darkness Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. 192 Chapter 2 Solve problems Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page. Background Cleanup Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image. Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother. Automatic Tone The product automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast, and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document. Default Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value. ENWW Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Job Build Fourth level Values Description Job Build off* Use to combine several original documents into one job. Also use to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time. The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. After you have scanned all the pages for the job, touch Finish to finish the job. Job Build on Cropping Options Do not crop* Crop to content Crop to paper Erase Edges Use inches Back side erase Front side erase Multi-feed Detection Disabled Enabled* Blank Page Suppression ENWW Disabled* Enabled Use this menu item to automatically crop the scan for digital sending. Use the Crop to content option to scan the smallest possible area that has detectable content. Use this menu item to remove blemishes, such as dark borders or staple marks, by cleaning the specified edges of the scanned image. In each of the text boxes enter the measurements, in millimeters or inches, for how much of the top edge, bottom edge, left edge, and right edge to clean. This setting stops the scanning process if it detects multiple-page feeds through the document feeder. Use to prevent blank pages in the original document from being included in the output document. Control-panel menus 193 Table 2-16 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Digital Send Service Setup Allow Usage of Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server Third level Fourth level Values Description Disabled Configure how the product interacts with the HP Digital Sending Software (DSS) server. HP DSS handles digital sending tasks, such as faxing, emailing, and sending scanned documents to a network folder or USB storage device. Enabled* Use the Allow Usage of Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server option to configure the product to use HP DSS. Allow Transfer to New Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server 194 Chapter 2 Solve problems Disabled Enabled* Use the Allow Transfer to New Digital Sending Software (DSS) Server option to specify whether DSS management of a product is transferable to a different DSS. ENWW Fax Settings menu (X585) To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Fax Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) First level Second level Third level Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Setup Wizard Fourth level Values Description Configure settings for sending faxes from the product. Use the Fax Setup Wizard feature to set up options for faxing. NOTE: To set up LAN fax or Internet fax, use the HP Embedded Web Server. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the product network address into a Web browser. To configure the fax features, select the Fax tab. Fax Dialing Settings Fax Dial Volume These settings control how the fax modem dials the outgoing fax number when faxes are sent. Off Low* High Dialing Mode Tone* Pulse Redial Interval 1-5 Minutes Default = 5 minutes Fax Send Speed Fast* Medium Slow Dialing Prefix Detect Dial Tone Redial on Error Range: 0-9 Default = 2 Redial on No Answer Range: 0-2 Default = 0 Redial on Busy Range: 0-9 Default = 3 ENWW Control-panel menus 195 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description General Fax Send Settings Fax Number Confirmation Enabled If this feature is enabled, you must enter the fax number twice. PC Fax Send Enabled* Disabled* Disabled JBIG Compression Enabled* Disabled Error Correction Mode Enabled* Disabled Fax Header Prepend* Overlay Fax Number Speed Dial Matching 196 Chapter 2 Solve problems Enabled Disabled* Enables users who have the correct driver installed to send faxes through the product from their computers. The JBIG compression reduces faxtransmission time, which can result in lower phone charges. However, using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off the JBIG compression. When error-correction mode is enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission, the product sends or receives the error portion again. Use to prepend or overlay the fax header page. Use this item to match the fax number that you type to numbers that are saved as a speed dial. ENWW Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes Off* When billing codes are enabled, a prompt displays that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax. This prompt does not appear if the Allow users to edit billing codes check box is not checked. On You can also use the billing codes report in the Reports menu to view the list of the billing codes that have been used for faxes that have been sent from the product. The list is grouped by billing code and also shows fax details. This feature can be used for billing or usage tracking. Default Billing Code Minimum Length Specify a default billing code for faxing. If you specify a default billing code, this code displays in the Billing Code field when the user sends an outgoing fax. If this field is blank, no default billing code is provided for the user. Range: 1-16 Default = 1 Allow users to edit billing codes ENWW Specify the required length of the billing code. Billing codes can be between 1 and 16 characters long. Off On* Control-panel menus 197 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Default Job Options Image Preview Fourth level Values Description Make optional* Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job. Select whether this feature is available on the product. Require preview Disable preview Make optional: The feature is optional, depending on the user who is signed in. Require preview Previews are required for all users. Disable preview: Previews are disabled for all users. Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Fine (200 x 200dpi) Superfine (300 x 300dpi) Original Sides 1-sided* 2-sided 198 Chapter 2 Solve problems Select the resolution for outgoing faxes. If you increase the resolution, faxes might be clearer but they could transmit more slowly. Some file types, for example a file that will be processed with OCR, require a specific resolution. When these file types are selected, the Resolution setting might be automatically changed to a valid value. Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation. If it is printed on both sides, also select the 2-sided format that matches the original document. ENWW Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Orientation Portrait* For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Landscape Portrait: This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape: This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top. 2-Sided Format Book-style* Book-style: The back side of the original is printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge. Flip-style Flip-style: The back side of the original is printed upside-down, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge. Notification Do not notify* Use to receive notification about the status of a sent document. Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this feature. Notify when job completes: Select to receive notification for this job only. Notify only if job fails: Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully. ENWW Control-panel menus 199 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Print: Select to print the notification at this product. E-mail E-mail: Select to receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following Email Address, and then enter the email address for the notification. Content Orientation Include Thumbnail When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification. Notification E-mail address Provide the email address that will receive notifications. Orientation Portrait* Landscape For some features to work correctly, you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page. Portrait: This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top. Landscape: This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top. 2-Sided Format Book-style* Flip-style 200 Chapter 2 Solve problems Use to configure the default style for 2sided print jobs. If the Book-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If the Flip-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed upsidedown. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge. ENWW Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Original Size Image Adjustment Darkness Values Description Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Use to describe the page size of the original document. Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. ENWW Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page. Background Cleanup Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image. Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother. Automatic Tone The product automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast, and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document. Default Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value. Control-panel menus 201 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed pictures, or a mixture. Text Printed picture Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures. Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy where text and/ or pictures are on the original. Printed picture: Use for line drawings and preprinted images, such as magazine clippings or pages from books. Photograph: Best suited for making copies of printed pictures. Job Build Job Build off* Job Build on Multi-feed Detection Disabled Enabled* Blank Page Suppression 202 Chapter 2 Solve problems Disabled* Enabled Use to divide a complex job into smaller segments. This is useful when you are copying or scanning an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can hold, or when you want to combine pages that have different sizes into one job. You can use either the glass or the document feeder to scan the original documents. Use this feature to prevent multiple pages being fed through the document feeder during document scans. Prevents blank pages in the original document from being included in the output document. ENWW Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Fax Receive Settings Fax Setup Wizard Third level Fourth level Values Description Configure settings for receiving faxes to the product. Use the Fax Setup Wizard feature to set up options for faxing. NOTE: To set up LAN fax or Internet fax, use the HP Embedded Web Server. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the product network address into a Web browser. To configure the fax features, select the Fax tab. Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Use to configure settings for receiving faxes. Off Low* High Rings To Answer Range: 1-6 Default = 1 Fax Receive Speed Fast* Medium Slow Ring Interval Range: 220-600 ms Default = 600 ms Ring Frequency Range: 1-200 Default = 68hz Fax Printing Schedule Always store faxes Always print faxes* Use Fax Printing Schedule ENWW If you have concerns about the security of private faxes, use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print. Open the Fax Printing Schedule submenu, and then you can choose to always store faxes, always print them, or you can set up a schedule for each day of the week. Control-panel menus 203 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Blocked Fax Numbers Third level Fourth level Values Description Schedule + (Add) Print incoming faxes Touch this to set up a fax printing schedule if you selected the Use Fax Printing Schedule option. Edit Store incoming faxes Delete (trash can) Time If you are using a fax printing schedule, use this menu to configure when to print faxes. Fax Number to Block Event Days The blocked fax list can contain up to 30 numbers. When the product receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job-accounting information. Add blocked numbers: Enter a fax number into the Fax Number to Block field, and then touch the arrow button to add a new number to the blocked fax list. To remove blocked numbers: Select a number and touch the Delete button to delete it from the blocked fax list. To clear all blocked numbers: Touch the Delete All button to clear all of the numbers from the blocked fax list. You also can use the Blocked Fax List report in the Information menu to view the list of the fax numbers that have been blocked on this product. 204 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Default Job Options Notification Fourth level Values Description Do not notify* Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document. Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this feature. Notify when job completes: Select to receive notification for this job only. Notify only if job fails: Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully. Print E-mail* Stamp Received Faxes Include Thumbnail NOTE: When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification. Notification E-mail address Touch this text field, provide the email address to which you want notifications sent, and then touch the OK button.. Enabled Disabled* ENWW E-mail: Select to receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following Email Address, and then enter the email address for the notification. Use this option to add the date, time, sender’s phone number, and page number to each page of the faxes that this product receives. Control-panel menus 205 Table 2-17 Fax Settings menu (X585) (continued) First level Second level Third level Fit to Page Fourth level Values Description Enabled* Use to shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. If this feature set to Disabled, faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple pages. Disabled Paper Selection Automatic* Select from a list of the trays. Sides 1-sided* 2-sided Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Forwarding Disabled* Enabled Type of Fax Job to Forward All faxes Sent faxes Use to describe the layout for each side of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. Use to forward received faxes to another fax machine. Use to select the type of fax jobs that you want forwarded. Received faxes Fax Forwarding Number Clear Fax Activity Log 206 Chapter 2 Solve problems Provide the forwarding phone number, and then touch the OK button. Clears all events from the fax activity log. ENWW General Print Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Print Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-18 General Print Settings menu First level Second level Manual Feed Values Description Enabled Use to enable or disable the manual-feed feature, which allows the user to feed paper into the product by hand. When this feature is enabled, the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job. If a tray is not specified as part of a job, manual feed is selected. Disabled* Courier Font Regular* Dark Wide A4 Enabled Disabled* Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled* Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled* Personality Auto* PCL PS PDF PCL Form Length Range: 5-128 Default = 60 Select which version of the Courier font you want to use. The factory default setting is Regular, which uses an average stroke width. The Dark setting can be used if a heavier Courier font is needed. Changes the printable area of A4size paper. If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. Use this feature to select whether a PostScript (PS) error page is printed when the product encounters a PS error. Selects whether a PDF error page is printed when the product encounters a PDF error. Configures the default print language or personality for the product. Normally you should not change the product language. If you change the setting to a specific product language, the product does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to it. Controls the PCL print-command options. PCL is a set of product commands that Hewlett-Packard developed to provide access to product features. Use the Form Length feature to select the user-soft default vertical form length. ENWW Control-panel menus 207 Table 2-18 General Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Orientation Portrait* Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals. Select the Portrait option if the short edge is at the top or select the Landscape option if the long edge is at the top. Landscape Font Source Internal* Selects the font source for the user-soft default font. The list of available options varies depending on the installed product options. Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font number for the user-soft default font using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu. The product assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list. The font number displays in the Font # column of the printout. Default = 0 Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 Default = 10 Font Point Size Range: 4.00-999.75 Default = 12.00 If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default point size (for a proportional-spaced font). Symbol Set Select from a list of symbol sets. Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. The factory default value for this option is PC-8. Either PC-8 or PC-850 are recommended for linedraw characters. Append CR to LF No* Configure whether a carriage return (CR) is appended to each line feed (LF) encountered in backwards-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Select Yes to append the carriage return. The default setting is No. Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line by using only the line-feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed. Yes 208 Chapter 2 Solve problems If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font, then use this feature to select a default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font). ENWW Table 2-18 General Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Suppress Blank Pages No* This option is for users who are generating their own PCL, which could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed. When the Yes option is selected, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank. Yes Media Source Mapping Standard* Classic Use to select and maintain input trays by number when you are not using the product driver, or when the software program has no option for tray selection. The following options are available: Standard: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models. Classic: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models. ENWW Control-panel menus 209 Print Options menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Print Options menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-19 Print Options menu First level Second level Number of Copies Default Paper Size Default Custom Paper Size X Dimension Values Description Range: 1-32000 Default = 1 Sets the default number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy function or the Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen. Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Configures the default paper size used for print jobs. Range: 3-8.5 inches Configures the default paper size that is used when the user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job. Default = 8.5 inches Y Dimension Range: 5-14 inches Default = 14 inches Use Inches Enabled* Disabled Sides 1-sided* 2-sided 2-Sided Format Book-style* Flip-style Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Edge-to-Edge output Quality Level General Office Professional* Use to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides. For example, select the 1-sided original, 2-sided output option when the original is printed on one side, but you want to make two-sided copies. Configures the default style for 2sided print jobs. If the Book-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge. If the Flip-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed upside-down. This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge. Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges. Set the default print quality setting. Presentation 210 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Display Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-20 Display Settings menu First level Second level Values Description Display Brightness Automatic* The Manual setting uses a slider to manually control the display brightness. Use to specify the intensity of the LCD control-panel display. On* Use to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the screen or press buttons on the control panel. Manual Key Press Sound Off Language Settings Language Select from a list of languages that the product supports. Use to select a different language for control-panel messages and specify the default keyboard layout. When you select a new language, the keyboard layout automatically changes to match the factory default for the selected language. Keyboard Layout Each language has a default keyboard layout. To change it, select from a list of layouts. Select the default keyboard layout that matches the language you want to use. How to Connect Button Display* X585 only Hide Use this menu item to display or hide the How to Connect Button on the Home screen. Date and Time Show Date and Time* X585 only Hide Date and Time Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 seconds X585 Flow only Default = 60 seconds ENWW Select whether to display or hide the date and time on the control panel Home screen. Specifies the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and when the product resets to the default settings. When the timeout expires, the control-panel display returns to the Home menu, and any user signed in to the product is signed out. Control-panel menus 211 Table 2-20 Display Settings menu (continued) First level Clearable Warnings Second level Values Description On Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning displays on the control panel. If the On setting is selected, clearable warnings appear until the Clearable Warnings button is pressed. If theJob setting is selected, clearable warnings stay on the display during the job that generated the warning and disappear from the display when the next job starts. Job* Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 seconds)* Touch OK to continue 212 Chapter 2 Solve problems Use this option to configure the product behavior when the product encounters certain errors. If the Auto-continue (10 seconds) option is selected, the job will continue after 10 seconds. If the Touch OK to continue option is selected, the job will stop and require the user to touch the OK button before continuing. ENWW Manage Supplies menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-21 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Supplies Status Values Description Print View Supply Settings Black Cartridge Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Set the estimated percentage at which the product notifies you when an ink cartridge is very low. Default = 10% Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Specifies how the product notifies you when an ink cartridge is very low. Stop: The product stops until you replace the cartridge. Prompt to continue: The product stops and prompts you to replace the cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing. Continue: The product alerts you that a cartridge is very low, but it continues printing. Color Cartridges Low Threshold Settings Cyan 1-100% Magenta Default = 10% Yellow ENWW Set the estimated percentage at which the product notifies you when an ink cartridge is very low. You can specify a different percentage for each color. Control-panel menus 213 Table 2-21 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Very Low Settings Fourth level Values Description Stop Specifies how the product notifies you when an ink cartridge is very low. Prompt to continue* Continue Stop: The product stops until you replace the cartridge. Prompt to continue: The product stops and prompts you to replace the cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing. Continue: The product alerts you that a cartridge is very low, but it continues printing. Ink Collection Unit Low Threshold Settings Very Low Settings 1-100% Default = 10% Stop Prompt to continue* Continue Set the estimated percentage at which the product notifies you when the ink collection unit capacity is very low. Specifies how the product notifies you when the ink collection unit capacity is very low. Stop: The product stops until you replace the unit. Prompt to continue: The product stops and prompts you to replace the unit. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing. Continue: The product alerts you that the ink collection unit capacity is very low, but it continues printing. Document Feeder Kit X585 only 214 Chapter 2 Solve problems Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Default = 10% Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when a document feeder kit is needed. ENWW Table 2-21 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Very Low Settings Fourth level Values Description Stop Configure how the product responds when the document feeder kit is reaching the end of its estimated life. Prompt to continue* Continue Stop: The product stops until you replace the document feeder kit. Prompt to continue: The product stops and prompts you to replace the document feeder kit. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue: The product alerts you that the document feeder kit is very low, but it continues printing. Restrict Color Use Enable color Disable color Color if allowed* Store Usage Data On supplies Not on supplies HP Cartridge Protection ENWW Off* Protect cartridges Use this feature to enable, restrict, or disable color printing or copying. The Store Usage Data menu provides a way to suppress the cartridges from storing most of the information gathered exclusively for the purpose of understanding the usage of the product. Select the On supplies setting to store the data on the ink cartridge memory chip. Select the Not on supplies setting to suppress the information from being stored on the memory chip. Enable or disable the HP Cartridge Protection feature. Control-panel menus 215 Table 2-21 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Supply Messages Third level Low Message Fourth level Values Description On* Use to configure whether a message displays on the control panel when supplies are getting low, but have not yet reached the low threshold. Off Reset Supplies New Ink Collection Unit New Document Feeder Kit (X585) 216 Chapter 2 Solve problems No Yes Reset Cancel Select the Yes option, and then touch the Save button if you have installed a new ink collection unit. Touch the Reset button if you have installed a new document feeder kit. ENWW Manage Trays menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Trays menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-22 Manage Trays menu First level Values Description Use Requested Tray Exclusively* Controls how the product handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray. Two options are available: First Exclusively: The product never selects a different tray when the user has indicated that a specific tray should be used, even if that tray is empty. First: The product pulls from another tray if the specified tray is empty, even though the user specifically indicated a tray for the job. Manually Feed Prompt Always* Unless loaded Indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the specified tray and the product pulls from the multipurpose tray instead. Two options are available: Always: A prompt always displays before using the multipurpose tray. Unless loaded: A message displays only if the multipurpose tray is empty. Size/Type Prompt Display* Do not display Controls whether the tray configuration message displays whenever a tray is closed. Two options are available: Display: Shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed. The user is able to configure the tray settings directly from this message. Do not display: Prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing. Use Another Tray Enabled* Disabled Use to turn on or off the control panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty. Two options are available: Enabled: When this option is selected, the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray. Disabled: When this option is selected, the user is not given the option of selecting a different tray. The product prompts the user to add paper to the tray that was initially selected. ENWW Control-panel menus 217 Table 2-22 Manage Trays menu (continued) First level Values Description Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Use to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet. When this option is selected, load the paper as you would for printing on both sides. See the user documentation that came with the product for instructions about loading letterhead for printing on both sides. When this option is selected, the product speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides. Enabled Duplex Blank Pages Auto* Yes Controls how the product handles two-sided jobs (duplexing). Two options are available: Auto: Enables Smart Duplexing, which instructs the product not to process blank pages. Yes: Disables Smart Duplexing and forces the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even if it is printed on only one side. This might be preferable for certain jobs that use paper types such as letterhead or prepunched paper. Override A4/Letter Yes* No 218 Chapter 2 Solve problems Prints on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size paper is loaded in the product (or to print on A4 paper when a lettersize job is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded). This option will also override A3 with ledger-size paper and ledger with A3-size paper. ENWW Network Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Network Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-23 Network Settings menu First level Values Description I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 sec Use to set the I/O timeout period in seconds. I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job fails. If the stream of data that the product receives for a print job is interrupted, this setting indicates how long the product will wait before it reports that the job has failed. Default = 15 See Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu on page 219 for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot, then both menus are available. Jetdirect Menu Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu First level Second level Information Print Sec Report Third level Fourth level Values Description Yes Yes: Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server. No* No: A security settings page is not printed. TCP/IP Enable On* On: Enable the TCP/IP protocol. Off Host Name Use the arrow buttons to edit the host name. NPIXXXXXX* ENWW Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol. An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the product. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address. Control-panel menus 219 Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level IPV4 Settings Config Method Fourth level Values Description Bootp Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server. DHCP* Auto IP Manual Bootp (Bootstrap Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, the DHCP Release menu and the DHCP Renew menu are available to set DHCP lease options. Auto IP: Use for automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned automatically. If you set this option to the Manual setting, use the Manual Settings menu to configure TCP/IPv4 parameters. Manual Settings IP Address Enter the address. Subnet Mask Enter the address. Default Gateway Enter the address. NOTE: This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu. 220 Chapter 2 Solve problems (Available only if the Config Method option is set to the Manual option.) Configure parameters directly from the product control panel. ENWW Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Default IP Values Description Auto IP* Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP). Legacy NOTE: This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network. Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products. Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Default = 0.0.0.0 IPV6 Settings Enable Off On* Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server. Off: IPv6 is disabled. On: IPv6 is enabled. Address Manual Settings Enable Address ENWW Use this item to enable and manually configure a TCP/IPv6 address. Control-panel menus 221 Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level DHCPV6 Policy Fourth level Values Description Router Specified Router Specified: The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server. Router Unavailable* Always Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. Always: Whether a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server. Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Default = 0.0.0.0 222 Chapter 2 Solve problems Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary Domain Name System (DNS) Server. Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary DNS Server. ENWW Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Proxy Server Third level Fourth level Values Description Select from a provided list. Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fullyqualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets. For some networks, you might need to contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address. ENWW Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535. Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout). Control-panel menus 223 Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Security Secure Web Third level Fourth level Values Description HTTPS Required* For configuration management, specify whether the HP Embedded Web Server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS Optional HTTPS Required: For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print server will appear as a secure site. IPSEC Keep Disable* Specify the IPSec status on the print server. Keep: IPSec status remains the same as currently configured. Disable: IPSec operation on the print server is disabled. 802.1X Reset Keep* Specify whether the 802.1X settings on the print server are reset to the factory defaults. Reset: The 802.1X settings are reset to the factory defaults. Keep: The current 802.1X settings are maintained. Reset Security Yes No* Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults. Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults. No: The current security settings are maintained. 224 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Fourth level Values Description Yes Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. No* Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select the Execute option to initiate the test. Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed. CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration. This test performs an internal loop-back test. An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network. HTTP Test Yes No* This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product, and tests the HP Embedded Web Server. Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it. ENWW Control-panel menus 225 Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level SNMP Test Fourth level Values Description Yes This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product. No* Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it. Data Path Test Yes No* This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless; the file will not print. Select the Yes option to choose this test, or the No option to not choose it. Select All Tests Yes No* Use this item to select all available embedded tests. Select the Yes option to choose all tests. Select the No option to select individual tests. Execution Time [H] Range: 1 – 24 hours Default = 1 hour Specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off. Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed. Execute No* Yes 226 Chapter 2 Solve problems No: Do not initiate the selected tests. Yes: Initiate the selected tests. ENWW Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Ping Test Dest Type Fourth level Values Description IPv4 This test is used to check network communications. It sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. IPv6 Specify whether the target product is an IPv4 or IPv6 node. Dest IPv4 Range: 0-255 Default = 127.0.0.1 Dest IPv6 Select from a provided list. Enter the IPv4 address. Enter the IPv6 address. Default = : : 1 Packet Size Default = 64 Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the maximum is 2048. Timeout Default = 001 Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The maximum is 100. Count Default = 004 Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 0 to 100. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0. Print Results Yes No* Execute Yes No* Ping Results ENWW Packets Sent Default = 00000 No: Do not initiate the selected tests. Yes: Initiate the selected tests. Shows the number of packets (0-65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. Control-panel menus 227 Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Packets Received Default = 00000 Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. The default is 0. Percent Lost Default = 000 Shows the percent (0 to 100) of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. RTT Min Default = 0000 Shows the minimum detected roundtriptime (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT Max Default = 0000 Shows the maximum detected roundtriptime (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT Average Default = 0000 Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. Ping In Progress Yes Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes Indicates a test in progress. No Indicates that a test completed or was not run. No* Refresh Yes No* 228 Chapter 2 Solve problems When viewing the ping test results, this item upgrades the ping test data with current results. Select the Yes option to upgrade the data, or the No option to maintain the existing data. However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu. ENWW Table 2-24 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Link Speed Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Auto* The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings: CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network product might be lost. The print server uses auto-negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either the 100TX Half feature or the 10T Half feature is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.) ENWW 10T Half 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 10T Full 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation. 10T Auto 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation. 100TX Half 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation. 100TX Full Limits autonegotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps. 100TX Auto 1000 Mbps, fullduplex operation. Control-panel menus 229 Troubleshooting menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-25 Troubleshooting menu First level Values Description Event Log Print Use to print a list of the 50 most recent events in the event log. For each event, the printed log shows the error number, page count, error code, and description or personality. Paper Path Page Print Shows how many pages were printed from each tray. Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.30 is the standard that specifies handshaking, protocols, and error correction between fax machines. When to Print Report Never automatically print* Configure the T.30 report to print after certain events. You can choose to print the report after every fax job, every fax job sent, every fax job received, every send error, or every receive error. Fax Second level Fax T.30 Trace Third level Fourth level X585 only Print after every fax Print only after fax send jobs Print after any fax error Print only after fax send errors Print only after fax receive errors Fax V.34 Normal* Off Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Diagnostic 230 Chapter 2 Solve problems Use to disable V.34 modulations if several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it. Used by a technician to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations. ENWW Table 2-25 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fax Log Entries Fourth level Values Description Standard* The standard fax log includes basic information such as the time and whether the fax was successful. The detailed fax log shows the intermediate results of the redial process not shown in the standard fax log. Detailed Print Quality Pages Diagnostic Tests Troubleshooting Guide Print Use to print a guide that can help you resolve problems with print quality. Diagnostics Page Print Use to print a diagnostics page. The page includes color swatches, diagnostic information, and calibration information. Print Quality Report Print Use to print a page that helps you resolve problems with print quality. Print Quality Service Pages Print Use to print more detailed, serviceoriented pages that can help you resolve problems with print quality. Printhead Diagnostic Page Print Use to print a page that includes printhead statistics. Source Tray Select from a list of the available trays. Generates a test page for testing paper handling features. You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths. Test Duplex Path Off* Paper Path Test Print Test Page On Number of Copies Range: 1-500 Default = 1 ENWW Sets the default number of copies for a copy job. This default applies when the Copy or Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen. The factory default setting is 1. Control-panel menus 231 Table 2-25 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Scanner Tests (X585 only) Sensors Continuous Scan (X585 only) 2-sided Advanced Diagnostic Pages Engine Diagnostics Page Servo Calibration Page Technical Information Page Description These pages provide more detailed information about certain components of the product. Select the reports you want to print, and then touch the Print button. Motor Status Page Data Path Page Pen Status Page Ink Delivery System Page Writing System Page Ink Supply Report Counters Report Hardware Status Page PWM Page Retrieve Diagnostic Data Create device data file Create zipped debug information file* Include crash dump files Clean up debug information Create files that contain information about the product that can help identify the cause of problems. NOTE: Send to Email is available only if Create device data file is selected. Send to E-mail Export to USB Generate Debug Data Start Startup Cartridge Substitute Disabled* 232 Chapter 2 Solve problems Enabled ENWW Device Maintenance menu Backup/Restore menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/ Restore menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-26 Backup/Restore menu First level Second level Back up Data Back up Data Third level Values Description Back up Now Initiate a backup. Cancel Restore Data Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file. Restore data from an external source. Calibrate/Cleaning menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/ Cleaning menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-27 Calibrate/Cleaning menu First level Second level Printhead Cleaning Values Description Continue Run this process to clean the printhead. Exit Resolve Ink Smear Start Cancel Advanced Calibration Support Run this process to send a cleaning page through the paper path. Use this submenu to use more advanced cleaning and calibration processes. Printhead Cleaning Level 1 Continue Printhead Cleaning Level 2 Exit Pen Align Continue Exit Color Density Calibration Print Quality Report Continue These two items perform a more thorough, detailed cleaning of the printhead. Each one runs for approximately 15 minutes. This process calibrates the pen unit. Exit Adjusts the print nozzles to have a uniform level of ink delivery and color intensity. Print Produce a print quality report. Cancel ENWW Control-panel menus 233 Table 2-27 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued) First level Second level Values Calibrate Scanner Touch Next to calibrate the product scanner. Messages on the control-panel display will lead you through the calibration process. X585 only Clean Rollers Reset Cancel Clean Document Feeder Settings Description Low Threshold Settings X585 only Range: 0-100% Default = 10% Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue* The Maintenance History screen is view only. There are two options: the Reset option to reset the page count, or the Cancel option to go back to the previous screen. Configure cleaning settings for the document feeder. Configure the product action if the document feeder requires cleaning. Continue 234 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen instructions. Service menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Service menu. The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel. See the Service mode function section in the product troubleshooting manual. ENWW Control-panel menus 235 Solve image quality problems Clean ink smears Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess ink from the printhead and paper path if you are having any of the following problems: ● Specks of ink are on the printed pages. ● Ink is smearing on the printed pages. ● Repeated marks occur on the printed pages. Use the following procedure to clean ink smears. 1. Load the product with regular, unused white paper. 2. From the control panel, touch the Device Maintenance button. 3. Open the Calibration/Cleaning menu. 4. Select the Resolve Ink Smear item. 5. Touch the Start button to begin the cleaning process. A page feeds through the product slowly. Retain this page for further print quality evaluation. If the print jobs are showing ink smears on the back of the page, try the following solutions ● Remove the ink collection unit and then reinstall it. Black ink can build up on the ink collection unit after several thousand pages. ● The platen might have an ink buildup. Run a few sheets of blank (no text / graphics) thick paper through the product to clean the platen. ● If the error persists, send the product in for service. Recover the printhead If the product is producing pages with faded or fuzzy black ink at the top of the page, try recovering the printhead. 1. Open the Device Maintenance menu. 2. Touch the Service menu. 3. Touch the Service Access Code item in the drop-down list, use the touchscreen keypad to enter the code, and then touch the OK button. 4. Touch the Printhead Recovery, and then touch the Start button. 5. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the process. 236 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems Product does not pick up paper or misfeeds ● The product does not pick up paper ● The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ● The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper The product does not pick up paper If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions. 1. Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper. 2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job. 3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the product control panel. 4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray. 5. Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue. 6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with warm water. The product picks up multiple sheets of paper If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions. 1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray. 2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product. 3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package. 4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray. 5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray. 6. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications. The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper ENWW ● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be removed. ● Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is closed. ● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed. ● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the stack. Solve paper jam or feed problems 237 ● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that the paper stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack. ● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages. Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray, and remove pages from the output bin. ● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path. ● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers. ● From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Supplies button. Check the status of the document-feeder kit, and replace it if necessary. Clear jams Auto-navigation for clearing jams The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel. When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure. Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions. 1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product. 2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package. 3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on. 4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray. 5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it. 6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product. 7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time. 8. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Trays button. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size. 9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications. 238 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the document feeder ENWW 1. Lift the latch to release the document-feeder cover. 2. Open the document-feeder cover. Solve paper jam or feed problems 239 3. Lift the jam-access door, and remove any jammed paper. If necessary, rotate the green wheel at the front of the document feeder to remove jammed paper. 4. Press on the door next to the document-feeder rollers to make sure it is closed completely. 240 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 5. Flow models only: Lift the document feeder input tray. 6. Flow models only: Squeeze inward on the two slots at each end of the e-Duplex assembly. 7. Flow models only: Remove the e-Duplex assembly by pulling it out. Solve paper jam or feed problems 241 8. Flow models only: Remove any jammed paper. 9. Flow models only: Reinstall the e-Duplex assembly by sliding it in until it locks into place. 10. Flow models only: Lower the document-feeder input tray. 242 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 11. Close the document-feeder cover. NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document feeder input tray are adjusted tightly against the document. Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents. NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than originals that are printed on plain paper. ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems 243 Clear jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 1. If the jammed sheet is visible and easily accessible in Tray 1, pull it from Tray 1. NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all of the fragments are removed before you resume printing. 2. The jammed sheet may also be accessible by removing Tray 2 and removing the jammed sheet by pulling it to the right and then out of the product. 3. If the jammed sheet is not visible or easily accessible in Tray 1, open the left door to access the jammed sheet. 244 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4. If the paper is still not visible or accessible, remove the ink collection unit by pulling it out with both hands. Set the unit aside, upright, on a piece of paper to prevent ink spills. CAUTION: When pulling out the ink collection unit, avoid making direct contact with the black cylinder to prevent ink smear on skin or clothes. 5. Lower the platen by pressing down on the green tab. This will cause the product to try to feed the sheet through the print zone. You may need to gently pull on the sheet if it does not feed. Remove the sheet. 6. Lift the green tab to place the platen back into its operating position. ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems 245 7. Reinstall the ink collection unit. 8. Close the left door. 246 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the left door 1. Open the left door. 2. Gently remove any visible paper from the rollers and delivery area. NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before you resume printing. Do not use sharp objects to remove fragments. 3. Close the left door. ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems 247 Clear jams in the ink collection unit area 1. Open the left door. 2. If you can see the trailing edge of the sheet, remove the sheet from the product. 3. If the paper is not visible or accessible, remove the ink collection unit by pulling it out with both hands. Set the unit aside, upright, on a piece of paper to prevent ink spills. CAUTION: When pulling out the ink collection unit, avoid making direct contact with the black cylinder to prevent ink smear on skin or clothes. 248 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4. Lower the platen by pressing down on the green tab. This will cause the product to try to feed the sheet through the print zone. You might need to gently pull on the sheet if it does not feed. Remove the sheet. 5. Lift the green tab to place the platen back into its operating position. ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems 249 6. Reinstall the ink collection unit. 7. Close the left door. 250 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in Tray 2 1. Open Tray 2 by pulling it out and releasing the latch at the rear left of the tray. 2. Remove the jammed sheet by pulling it to the right and then out of the product. 3. Close Tray 2. NOTE: To close the tray, push in the middle or with even pressure on both sides. Avoid pushing on one side only. ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems 251 Clear jams in the output bin 1. Look for jammed paper in the output bin area. caps lock A shift Z @ S X D C alt F V G B H N J 2. K M L : ; , alt . ‘ ? / “ enter shift Remove any visible media. NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before resuming printing. caps lock A shift Z @ S X alt D C F V G B H N J 3. K M alt , L : ; . / ? ‘ “ enter shift Open and then close the left door to clear the message. 252 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in optional Tray 3 1. Open Tray 3. 2. Remove the jammed sheet by pulling it to the right and then out of the product. 3 3. If the jam cannot be cleared at the tray, try clearing the jam from the lower left door. NOTE: If a jammed sheet tears while being removed, paper fragments might become lodged in the paper path between optional Tray 3 and the product. Lift the product from optional Tray 3, and then remove any paper fragments from the tray assembly. 4. Close Tray 3. NOTE: To close the tray, push in the middle or with even pressure on both sides. Avoid pushing on one side only. 3 ENWW Solve paper jam or feed problems 253 Solve performance problems The product does not print If the product does not print at all, try the following solutions. ● Make sure the product is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready. ◦ If the control panel does not indicate the product is ready, turn the product off and then on again. ◦ If the control panel indicates the product is ready, try sending the job again. ● If the control panel indicates the product has an error, resolve the error and then try to print a test page from the control panel. If the test page prints, there may be a communication problem between the product and the computer you are trying to print from. ● Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the product is connected to a network, check the following items: ◦ Check the light next to the network connection on the product. If the network is active, the light is green. ◦ Make sure that you are using a network cable and not a phone cord to connect to the network. ◦ Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly. ● Install the HP software from the CD that came with the product. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue. ● From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and open the Ports tab. ◦ If you are using a network cable to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the Ports tab matches the product name on the product configuration page. ◦ If you are using a USB cable and are connecting to a wireless network, make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB. ● If you are using a personal firewall system on the computer, it might be blocking communication with the product. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem. ● If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs. If the control panel displays a General Printer Failure message, turn the product off and then on. If that does not clear the error, call HP for support. If the product indicates that ink levels are too low, but the ink cartridges still have ink in them, make sure the product is set on a level surface. The product prints slowly If the product prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions. 254 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this product. For a list of specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 or www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585. 2. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type. 3. If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs. 4. If the product is in an environment that experiences high humidity, low temperatures, or both conditions, the print speed might be affected. Solve performance problems 255 Solve connectivity problems Solve USB direct-connect problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the USB cable. ● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product. ● Verify that the cable is not longer than 5 m (16.4 ft). Try using a shorter cable. ● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it with another product. Replace the cable if necessary. Solve network problems Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on this page. ● Poor physical connection ● The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product ● The computer is unable to communicate with the product ● The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network ● New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ● The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly ● The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect Poor physical connection 1. Verify that the product is attached to the correct ethernet port using the proper cable. 2. Verify that cable connections are securely attached. 3. Look at the ethernet port on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are active. 4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the network router, switch, or hub. The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product 1. On the computer, open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page or through the control panel. 2. If you installed the product using an HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this printer, even if its IP address changes. 3. If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address. If you installed the product using the CD installer, or downloaded the fully-featured installer from the HP's web site, you can view or change the product IP address using the following steps: 256 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4. a. Click Start. b. Click All Programs. c. Click HP. d. Click your product. e. Click Update IP Address to open a utility that reports the known (“previous”) IP address for the product and allows you to change the IP address, if necessary. If the IP address is correct, delete the product entry from the list of installed printers, and then add it again. The computer is unable to communicate with the product 1. 2. Test network communication by pinging the product. a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product. c. If the window displays round-trip times, both the network and device are working. If the ping command failed, verify that the network router, hubs, or switches are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network. The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network. New software programs might be causing compatibility problems Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer driver. The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly 1. Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection. 2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly. The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect 1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary. 2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary. Solve wireless network problems ENWW ● Wireless connectivity checklist ● The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this product has been turned off ● The product does not print after the wireless configuration completes ● The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall installed Solve connectivity problems 257 ● The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or product ● Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product ● The wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN ● The network does not appear in the wireless networks list ● The wireless network is not functioning Wireless connectivity checklist ● The product and the wireless router are turned on and have power. Also make sure the wireless radio in the product is turned on. ● The service set identifier (SSID) is correct. Print a configuration page to determine the SSID. If you are not sure the SSID is correct, run the wireless setup again. ● With secured networks, make sure the security information is correct. If the security information is incorrect, run the wireless setup again. ● If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on the wireless network. If the network has Internet access, try connecting to the Internet over another wireless connection. ● The encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the product as it is for the wireless access point, such as a wireless router (on networks using WPA security). ● The product is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the product must be within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point (wireless router). ● Obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access point and the product. Make sure poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete do not separate the product and wireless access point. ● The product is located away from electronic devices that might interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including motors, cordless phones, security system cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices. ● The print driver is installed on the computer. ● You have selected the correct printer port. ● The computer and product connect to the same wireless network. The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this product has been turned off 1. Touch the Administration button, and then touch the Wireless Setup menu. 2. Touch the Turn Wireless Off/On button, and then touch the On button. The product does not print after the wireless configuration completes 1. Make sure the product is turned on and in the ready state. 2. Make sure you are connecting to the correct wireless network. 3. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly. 258 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4. a. On the control panel, touch the Administration button, and then touch the Network Configuration menu item. b. Select the Print Wireless Network Test item to test the wireless network. The product prints a report with the results. Make sure that the correct port or product is selected. a. b. 5. For products installed without the fully-featured installer: i. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and then open the Ports tab. ii. Make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB. If you installed the product using the CD installer, or downloaded the fully-featured installer from the HP's Web site, you can view or change the product IP address using the following steps: i. Click Start. ii. Click All Programs. iii. Click HP. iv. Click your product. v. Click Update IP Address to open a utility that reports the known (“previous”) IP address for the product and allows you to change the IP address, if necessary. Make sure that that computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer. The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall installed 1. Update the firewall with the most recent update available from the manufacturer. 2. If programs request firewall access when you install the product or try to print, make sure you allow the programs to run. 3. Temporarily turn off the firewall, and then install the wireless product on the computer. Enable the firewall when you have completed the wireless installation. The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or product Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that the computer connects to. ENWW 1. From the control panel, touch the Administration button, and then touch the Reports menu. 2. Select the Network Configuration Page item to print the report. 3. Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the SSID in the printer configuration for your computer. 4. If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Reconfigure the wireless setup for the product. Solve connectivity problems 259 Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product 1. Make sure that the other computers are within the wireless range and that no obstacles block the signal. For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point. 2. Make sure the product is turned on and in the ready state. 3. Turn off any third-party firewalls on the computer. 4. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly. 5. a. On the product control panel, touch the Administration button, and then touch the Network Configuration menu. b. Touch the Print Wireless Test Report item to test the wireless network. The product prints a report with the results. Make sure that the correct port or product is selected. a. b. 6. For products installed without the fully-featured installer: i. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and then open the Ports tab. ii. Make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB. If you installed the product using the CD installer, or downloaded the fully-featured installer from the HP's Web site, you can view or change the product IP address using the following steps: i. Click Start. ii. Click All Programs. iii. Click HP. iv. Click your product. v. Click Update IP Address to open a utility that reports the known (“previous”) IP address for the product and allows you to change the IP address, if necessary. Make sure that the computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer. The wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN ● Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time. The network does not appear in the wireless networks list ● Make sure the wireless router is turned on and has power. ● The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden network. The wireless network is not functioning 1. To verify if the network has lost communication, try connecting other devices to the network. 2. Test network communication by pinging the network. 260 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 3. ENWW a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. b. Type ping followed by the IP address for the wireless router. c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working. Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that your computer connects to. a. From the product control panel, touch the Administration button, and then touch the Reports menu. b. Touch the Network Configuration Page item to print the report. c. Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the SSID in the printer configuration for your computer. d. If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Reconfigure the wireless setup for your product. Solve connectivity problems 261 Service mode functions Service menu and Secondary service menu Product resets Restore the factory-set defaults CAUTION: Restoring the factory-set defaults returns all of the product and network settings to the factory defaults, and it also clears the fax header name, phone number, and any stored faxes in the product memory. This procedure also clears the fax phone book, and deletes any pages that are stored in the memory. The procedure then automatically restarts the product. 1. On the product control panel, touch the Administration button. 2. Open the General Settings menu. 3. Scroll to and touch the Restore Factory Settings button, and then touch the Restore button. The product automatically restarts. Restore the service ID Restore the service ID If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates: 1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the product was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12. 2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9. ● Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287. Convert the service ID to an actual date You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows: 1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed. 2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month. 3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date. Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows: 1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002. 2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October. 3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. 4. The complete date is 17-October-2002. 262 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system. Product cold reset Cold reset using the Preboot menu 1. Turn the product on. 2. The HP logo displays on the product control panel. When an underscore displays below the HP logo, touch the logo to open the Preboot menu. 3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the OK button. 4. Use the down arrow button to highlight Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button. 5. Use the down arrow button to highlight the Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button. 6. Touch the Home button to highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button. NOTE: The product will initialize. Solve fax problems Fax reports In addition to the product reports, the product also features several fax reports. Fax test report The user can use the fax test report to check the status of the product and ensure that it is set up appropriately for faxing. Perform this test after the product is set up for faxing. The fax test performs the following activities: ● Tests the fax hardware. ● Checks whether the fax is connected to an active telephone wall jack. ● Checks whether the phone cord is plugged into the correct port. ● Checks whether the correct type of phone cord is connected to the HP printer. ● Checks for a dial tone. ● Checks for an active fax phone line. The fax test report shows the following information: ● Pass/fail results for each of the fax setup tests ● Current fax settings to help diagnose issues ● Instructions on how to rerun the test Guidelines for running the fax test Before running the fax test, ensure that the following guidelines are met: ENWW Solve fax problems 263 ● The ink cartridges are installed properly. ● Full-size paper is loaded in the main tray. ● The product is set up for faxing according to the particular home or office setup instructions. Running the fax test 1. On the control panel, open the Administration menu. 2. Open the Tools menu, and then touch the Run Fax Test item. The product displays the status of the test and prints a report. 3. Review the report. ● If the test passes and you are still having problems faxing, check the fax settings listed in the report to verify the settings are correct. A blank or incorrect fax setting can cause problems faxing. ● If the test fails, review the report for more information about how to fix any problems found. Solve fax test failure If the fax test fails to run, the product might be busy with another task, or it may have an error condition preventing it from running the fax test. If the test fails, check the following possible issues: 1. Verify that the product is set up properly, and connected to a power supply and to the computer. For more information on setting up the product, see the user guide that came with the product. 2. Verify that the product is powered on. If it is not, press the power button. 3. Verify that the ink cartridges are installed correctly and the front door is closed. 4. Verify that the product is not currently busy with another task. Check the display. If the product is busy, wait until it completes the current task and the run the fax test again. 5. Verify that the rear door is attached to the back of the product. 6. Verify that there are no error messages on the control-panel display. If there is an error message, resolve the problem and then run the test again. Fax confirmation report This report provides printed confirmation that the fax was successfully sent. The default fax confirmation setting is Off. To enable fax confirmation through the control panel, complete the following steps: 1. On the control panel, open the Administration menu. 2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Advanced Fax Setup menu. 3. Touch the Fax Confirmation item. 4. Select one of the following options: ● On (Fax Send): Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax you send. ● On (Fax Receive): Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax you receive. 264 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ● On (Send and Receive): Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax you send and receive. ● Off: Does not print a fax confirmation report when you send and receive faxes successfully. This is the default setting. Fax error report You can configure the product so that it automatically prints a report when there is an error during transmission or reception. To set up the product to automatically print fax error reports, complete the following steps: 1. On the control panel, open the Administration menu. 2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Advanced Fax Setup menu. 3. Touch the Fax Error Report item. 4. Select one of the following options: ● On (Fax Send): Prints whenever a transmission error occurs. ● On (Fax Receive): Prints whenever a receiving error occurs. ● On (Send and Receive): Prints whenever a fax error occurs. This is the default setting. ● Off: Does not print any fax error reports. Fax last transaction report The Fax Last Transaction Report prints the details of the last fax transaction that occurred. Details include the fax number, number of pages, and the fax status. To print the last fax transaction report, complete the following steps: 1. On the control panel, open the Administration menu. 2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Fax Reports menu. 3. Touch the Last Transaction item. Fax log The fax log lists the last 30 transactions and the results. The report includes faxes that have been sent from the product control panel and all faxes that have been received. Each entry in the log contains the following information: ● Transmission date and time ● Type (whether received or sent) ● Fax number ● Duration ● Number of pages ● Result (status) of transmission To print the fax log from the product control panel, complete the following steps: ENWW Solve fax problems 265 1. On the control panel, open the Administration menu. 2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Fax Reports menu. 3. Touch the Fax Log item. Caller ID report Use the following procedure to print a history of caller ID fax numbers. If there are no calls in the ID history, the history could have been cleared during a power cycle or the user has not signed up for the caller ID service with the user’s phone company. 1. On the control panel, open the Administration menu. 2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Fax Reports menu. 3. Touch the Caller ID Report item. Possible fax issues The following issues are the faxing issues that you might encounter, and the associated troubleshooting actions. Issue Solution The fax test failed. If you ran a fax test and the test failed, review the report for basic information about the error. For more detailed information, check the report to see which part of the test failed, and then review the appropriate topic in this section for a solution. The “Fax Hardware Test” failed. ● 266 Chapter 2 Solve problems Power off the product by using the power button located on the product control panel and then unplug the power cord from the back of the product. After a few seconds, ENWW Issue Solution plug the power cord in again, and then power on the product. Run the test again. If the test fails again, continue reviewing the troubleshooting information in this section. ● Try to send or receive a test fax. If you can send or receive a fax successfully, there might not be a problem. ● If you are running the test from the Fax Setup Wizard (Windows) or HP Fax Setup Utility (Mac OS), ensure that the product is not busy completing another task, such as receiving a fax or making a copy. Check the display for a message indicating that the product is busy. If the product is busy, wait until the job is finished and the product is in the idle state before running the test. ● Ensure that you use the phone cord that came with the product. If you do not use the supplied phone cord to connect the product to the telephone wall jack, you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone cord that came with the product, run the fax test again. You might need to connect the supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for your country/region. ● If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. A splitter is a twocord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack. Try removing the splitter and connecting the product directly to the telephone wall jack. ● After you resolve any problem that is found, run the fax test again to check if the product passes the test and is ready for faxing. If the Fax Hardware Test continues to fail and you experience problems faxing, contact HP Support at www.hp.com/support. If prompted, choose your country/region, and then click Contact HP for information on calling for technical support. The “Fax Connected to Active Telephone Wall Jack” test failed. ENWW ● Check the connection between the telephone wall jack and the product to ensure that the phone cord is secure. ● Ensure that you use the phone cord that came with the product. If you do not use the supplied phone cord to connect the product to the telephone wall jack, you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone cord that came with the product, run the fax test again. You might need to connect the supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for your country/region. ● Ensure that you have correctly connected the product to the telephone wall jack. Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. ● Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack that you are using for the product and check for dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone, contact your telephone company and have them check the line. ● Try sending or receiving a test fax. If you can do that successfully, there might not be a problem. ● After you resolve any problem that is found, run the fax test again to check if the product passes the test and is ready for faxing. The fax test failed. The “Phone Cord Connected to Correct Port on Fax” test failed. (continued) 1. Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. 2. After you have connected the phone cord to the port labeled 1-LINE, run the fax test again to check if the product passes the test and is ready for faxing. 3. Try to send or receive a test fax. Solve fax problems 267 Issue Solution ● Make sure you use the phone cord that came with the product. If you do not use the supplied phone cord to connect from the telephone wall jack to the product, you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone cord that came with the product, run the fax test again. ● If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a two-cord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the splitter and connecting the product directly to the telephone wall jack. The "Using Correct Type of Phone Cord with Fax" test failed. 268 Chapter 2 Solve problems ● Make sure you used the phone cord supplied in the box with the product to connect to the telephone wall jack. One end of the phone cord should be connected to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the product, and the other end to your telephone wall jack. If the phone cord that came with the product is not long enough, use a coupler to extend the length. ● Check the connection between the telephone wall jack and the product to ensure the phone cord is secure. ● Ensure that you use the phone cord that came with the product. If you do not use the supplied phone cord to connect the product to the telephone wall jack, you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone cord that came with the product, run the fax test again. You might need to connect the supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for your country/region. ● If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. A splitter is a twocord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack. Try removing the splitter and connecting the product directly to the telephone wall jack. ENWW ENWW Issue Solution The fax test failed. The “Dial Tone Detection” test failed. (continued) Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the product, might be causing the test to fail. To determine if the other equipment is causing a problem, disconnect everything from the phone line, and then run the test again. If the product passes the Dial Tone Detection Test without the other equipment connected, then one or more pieces of the equipment is causing problems. Try adding them back one at a time and rerunning the test each time, until you identify which piece of equipment is causing the problem. ● Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack that you are using for the product and check for dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone, contact your telephone company and have them check the line. ● Ensure that you have correctly connected the product to the telephone wall jack. ● Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. ● If your telephone system is not using a standard dial tone, such as the one used by some PBX systems, the test might fail. This will not cause a problem in sending or receiving faxes. Try sending or receiving a test fax. ● Check to ensure that the country/region setting is set appropriately. If the country/ region setting is not set or is set incorrectly, the test might fail, and you might have problems in sending and receiving faxes. ● Ensure that you connect the product to an analog phone line or you will not be able to send or receive faxes. To check if your phone line is digital, connect a regular analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal sounding dial tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones. Connect the product to an analog phone line and try sending or receiving a fax. ● Ensure that you use the phone cord that came with the product. If you do not use the supplied phone cord to connect the product to the telephone wall jack, you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone cord, run the fax test again. ● After you resolve any problem that is found, run the fax test again to check if the product passes the test and is ready for faxing. If the dial tone detection test continues to fail, contact your telephone company and have them check the phone line. The fax test failed. The “Fax Line Condition” test failed. (continued) ● Ensure that you connect the product to an analog phone line or you will not be able to send or receive faxes. To check if your phone line is digital, connect a regular analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal sounding dial Solve fax problems 269 Issue Solution tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones. Connect the product to an analog phone line and try sending or receiving a fax. The display always shows Phone Off Hook. The product is having problems sending and receiving faxes. 270 Chapter 2 Solve problems ● Check the connection between the telephone wall jack and the product to make sure that the phone cord is secure. ● Ensure that you have correctly connected the product to the telephone wall jack. ● Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. You might need to connect the supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for your country/ region. ● Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the product, might be causing the test to fail. To determine if the other equipment is causing a problem, disconnect everything from the phone line, and then run the test again. ● If the Fax Line Condition Test passes without the other equipment, then one or more pieces of the equipment is causing problems; try adding them back one at a time and rerunning the test each time, until you identify which piece of equipment is causing the problem. ● If the Fax Line Condition Test fails even after removing the other connected equipment, connect the product to a working phone line and continue reviewing the troubleshooting information in this section. ● If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. A splitter is a twocord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack. Try removing the splitter and connecting the product directly to the telephone wall jack. ● Ensure that you use the phone cord that came with the product. If you do not use the supplied phone cord to connect the product to the telephone wall jack, you might not be able to send or receive faxes. After you plug in the phone cord that came with the product, run the fax test again. ● After you resolve any problem that is found, run the fax test again to check if the product passes the test and is ready for faxing. If the Fax Line Condition test continues to fail and you experience problems faxing, contact your telephone company and have them check the phone line. ● You are using the wrong type of phone cord. Ensure that you are using the phone cord that came with the product to connect the product to your phone line. If the phone cord that came with the product is not long enough, you can use a coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an electronics store that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone cord, which can be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your home or office. ● Other equipment that uses the same phone line as the product might be in use. Ensure that the extension phones—phones on the same phone line, but not connected to the product—or other equipment are not in use or off the hook. For example, you cannot use the product for sending a fax if an extension phone is off the hook, or if you are using a computer dial-up modem to send e-mail or access the Internet. ● Ensure that the product is powered on. Look at the display on the product. If the display is blank and the Power light is not lit, the product is powered off. Check if the ENWW Issue Solution power cord is firmly connected to the product and plugged into a power outlet. Press the power button to power on the product. ENWW ● After powering on the product, HP recommends that you wait five minutes before sending or receiving a fax. The product cannot send or receive faxes while it is initializing after being powered on. ● Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. ● If the phone cord that came with the product is not long enough, you can use a coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an electronics store that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone cord, which can be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your home or office. ● Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack that you are using for the product and check for a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone, call your local telephone company for service. ● Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the product, might be in use. For example, you cannot use the product for faxing if an extension phone is off the hook, or if you are using a computer dial-up modem to send an e-mail or access the Internet. ● Check to see if another process has caused an error. Check the control-panel display or your computer for an error message that provides information about the problem and its resolution. If there is an error, the product will not send or receive a fax until the error condition is resolved. ● The phone line connection might be noisy. Phone lines with poor sound quality (noise) can cause faxing problems. Check the sound quality of the phone line by plugging a phone into the telephone wall jack and listening for static or other noise. If you hear noise, turn Error Correction Mode (ECM) off and try faxing again. For information about changing ECM, see the onscreen Help. If the problem persists, contact your telephone company. The product is having problems sending and receiving faxes. ● If you are using a digital subscriber line (DSL) service, make sure that you have a DSL filter connected or you will not be able to fax successfully. (continued) ● Ensure that the product is not connected to a telephone wall jack that is set up for digital phones. To check if your phone line is digital, connect a regular analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal sounding dial tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones. ● If you are using a private branch exchange (PBX) or an integrated services digital network (ISDN) converter/terminal adapter, make sure that the product is connected to the correct port and the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your country/region, if possible. ● If the product shares the same phone line with a DSL service, the DSL modem might not be properly grounded. If the DSL modem is not properly grounded, it can create noise on the phone line. Phone lines with poor sound quality (noise) can cause faxing problems. You can check the sound quality of the phone line by plugging a phone into the telephone wall jack and listening for static or other noise. If you hear noise, power off your DSL modem for at least 15 minutes, after which, power on the DSL modem again and listen to the dial tone. If the phone line is still noisy, contact your telephone company. For information on how to power off your DSL modem, contact your DSL provider for support. ● If you are using a phone splitter, this can cause faxing problems. (A splitter is a twocord connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack.) Try removing the splitter and connecting the product directly to the telephone wall jack. Solve fax problems 271 Issue Solution The product is having problems sending a manual fax. ● Ensure that the telephone you use to initiate the fax call is connected directly to the product. To send a fax manually, the telephone must be connected directly to the port labeled 2-EXT on the product. ● If you are sending a fax manually from a phone that is connected directly to the product, you must use the keypad on the telephone to send the fax. You cannot use the keypad on the product control panel. ● If you are not using a distinctive ring service, check to make sure that the Distinctive Ring feature on the product is set to All Rings ● If Auto Answer is set to Off, you will need to receive faxes manually; otherwise, the product will not receive the fax. ● If you have a voice mail service on the same phone number that you use for fax calls, you must receive faxes manually, not automatically. This means that you must be available to respond in person to incoming fax calls. ● If you have a computer dial-up modem on the same phone line as the product, check to make sure that the software that came with your modem is not set to receive faxes automatically. Modems that are set up to receive faxes automatically take over the phone line to receive all incoming faxes. As a result, the product doesn’t receive fax calls. ● If you have an answering machine on the same phone line with the product, you might have one of the following problems: The product cannot receive faxes, but can send faxes. ● 272 Chapter 2 Solve problems ◦ Your answering machine might not be set up properly with the product. ◦ Your outgoing message might be too long or too loud to allow the product to detect fax tones, and the sending fax machine might disconnect. ◦ Your answering machine might not have enough quiet time after your outgoing message to allow the product to detect fax tones. This problem is most common with digital answering machines. The following actions might help solve the above stated problems. ◦ When you have an answering machine on the phone line that you use for fax calls, try connecting the answering machine directly to the product. ◦ Ensure that the product is set to receive faxes automatically. For information on setting up the product to receive faxes automatically, see Receive a fax. ◦ Ensure the Rings to Answer setting is set to a greater number of rings than the answering machine. ◦ Disconnect the answering machine and then try receiving a fax. If faxing is successful without the answering machine, the answering machine might be causing the problem. ◦ Reconnect the answering machine and record your outgoing message again. Record a message that is approximately 10 seconds in duration. Speak slowly and at a low volume when recording your message. Leave at least 5 seconds of ENWW Issue Solution silence at the end of the voice message. There should be no background noise when recording this silent time. Try to receive a fax again. The product cannot send faxes, but can receive faxes. Fax tones are recorded on the answering machine. The phone cord that came with the product is not long enough. ENWW ● If the product shares the same phone line with other types of phone equipment, such as an answering machine, a computer dial-up modem, or a multi-port switch box, the fax signal level might be reduced. The signal level can also get reduced if you use a splitter or connect extra cables to extend the length of your phone. A reduced fax signal can cause problems during fax reception. To find out if other equipment is causing a problem, disconnect everything except the product from the phone line, and then try to receive a fax. If you can receive faxes successfully without the other equipment connected, one or more pieces of the other connected equipment is causing problems; try adding them back one at a time and receiving a fax each time, until you identify which equipment is causing the problem. ● If you have a special ring pattern for your fax phone number (using a distinctive ring service through your telephone company), make sure that the Distinctive Ring feature on the product is set to match. ● The product might be dialing too fast or too soon. You might need to insert some pauses in the number sequence. For example, if you need to access an outside line before dialing the phone number, insert a pause following the access number. If your number is 95555555, and 9 accesses an outside line, you might insert pauses as follows: 9-555-5555. To enter a pause in the fax number you are typing, touch Redial/ Pause, or touch Space (#) repeatedly, until a dash (-) appears on the display. ● You can also send the fax by using monitor dialing. This enables you to listen to the phone line as you dial. You can set the pace of your dialing and respond to prompts as you dial. ● The number you entered when sending the fax is not in the proper format or the receiving fax machine is having problems. To check this, try calling the fax number from a telephone and listen for fax tones. If you cannot hear fax tones, the receiving fax machine might not be powered on or connected, or a voice mail service could be interfering with the recipient's phone line. You can also ask the recipient to check the receiving fax machine for any problems. ● When you have an answering machine on the same phone line that you use for fax calls, try connecting the answering machine directly to the product. If you do not connect the answering machine as recommended, fax tones might be recorded on your answering machine. ● Ensure that the product is set to receive faxes automatically and that the Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings to answer for the product should be greater than the number of rings to answer for the answering machine. If the answering machine and the product are set to the same number of rings to answer, both devices answer the call and fax tones are recorded on the answering machine. ● Set your answering machine to a low number of rings and the product to answer in the maximum number of rings supported. (The maximum number of rings varies by country/region.) In this setup, the answering machine answers the call and the product monitors the line. If the product detects fax tones, the product receives the fax. If the call is a voice call, the answering machine records the incoming message. ● If the phone cord that came with the product is not long enough, you can use a coupler to extend the length. You can purchase a coupler at an electronics store that carries phone accessories. You will also need another phone cord, which can be a standard phone cord that you might already have in your home or office. ● To extend your phone cord, complete the following steps. Solve fax problems 273 Issue Solution 1. Using the phone cord supplied with the product, connect one end to the coupler, then connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the product. 2. Connect another phone cord to the open port on the coupler and the telephone wall jack. Color faxes do not print ● The Incoming Fax Printing option might be turned off. To print color faxes, make sure that the Incoming Fax Printing option in the product control panel is turned on. The computer cannot receive faxes (Fax to PC or Fax to Mac) ● The computer selected to receive faxes might be turned off. Ensure that the computer selected to receive faxes is switched on at all times. ● Different computers might be configured for setup and receiving faxes and one of them might be switched off. If the computer receiving faxes is different from the one used for setup, both computers should be switched on at all times. ● Fax to PC or Fax to Mac might not be activated or the computer might not be configured to receive faxes. Activate Fax to PC or Fax to Mac and make sure the computer is configured to receive faxes. 274 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Product upgrades NOTE: If you are installing a replacement HDD or SSM, use this procedure to install the product firmware on the replacement drive. If you are removing the HDD or SSM so that it can be installed on a replacement formatter, you can skip this procedure. 1. Locate the product support Web site. ● In the US: ◦ ● Go to www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 or www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585. Outside the US: a. Go to www.hp.com/support. b. Select your country/region. c. Select Drivers & Downloads. d. Enter the product name, and then click Go. e. Select your product model. 2. Select Cross operating system (BIOS, Firmware, Diagnostics, etc.). 3. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download. 4. Copy the firmware upgrade file to the root directory of a USB flash drive. The firmware upgrade file has a .bdl extension. 5. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the product control panel, and then turn the product power on. 6. The following message displays on the control panel: Error: 99.09.63 Incorrect Disk. Touch the OK button to continue. 7. Wait for the Pre-Boot menu to appear on the control-panel display, and then touch the down arrow button to scroll to 3 Administrator. Touch the OK button to select it. 8. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to 6 Manage Disk. Touch the OK button to select it 9. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to + 6 Boot Device. Touch the OK button to select it. 10. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Erase / Unlock. Touch the OK button to select it 11. The message Proceed with Requested Action displays. Touch the OK button to select it. 12. Touch the back ENWW button to return to the Pre-Boot menu home screen. 13. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to 3 Administrator. Touch the OK button to select it. 14. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to 1 Download. Touch the OK button to select it. 15. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to 3 USB Thumbdrive. Touch the OK button to select it. Product upgrades 275 16. Touch the down arrow button to scroll to the firmware upgrade file that you downloaded in step 4. Touch the OK button to select it. NOTE: If no .bdl files are listed, try saving the file to a different USB flash drive. 17. Wait while the file transfers. When the transfer is complete, the message Complete displays on the screen. 18. Turn the product off, remove the USB flash drive, and then turn the product on. Wait for several minutes while the product initializes. 276 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW A ENWW Service and support ● Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● End User License Agreement ● OpenSSL ● Customer self-repair warranty service ● Customer support 277 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Officejet Enterprise Color X555dn, X555xh, and MFP X585dn, X585f, X585z 1 year HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 278 Appendix A Service and support ENWW UK, Ireland, and Malta The name and address of the HP entity responsible for the performance of the HP Limited Warranty in your country is as follows: United Kingdom: Hewlett-Packard Ltd Cain Road Bracknell GB-Berks RG12 1HN Eire: Hewlett-Packard Ireland Limited, 63-74 Sir John Rogerson's Quay, Dublin 2 Malta: Hewlett-Packard International Trade B.V. Malta Branch, 48, Amery Street, Sliema SLM 1701, MALTA You may have additional statutory rights against the seller based on your purchase agreement. Those rights are not in any way affected by this HP Limited Warranty. Austria, Belgium, Germany, and Luxemburg Als Anlage finden Sie die Namen und Adressen der jeweiligen HP Gesellschaft, die in Ihrem Land die HP Herstellergarantie gewährt. Deutschland: Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen Österreich: Hewlett-Packard Ges.m.b.H., Wienerbergstrasse 41, A-1120 Wien Luxemburg: Hewlett-Packard Luxembourg SCA, Vegacenter 75, Parc d'Activités Capellen, L-8308 Capellen Belgien: Hewlett-Packard Belgium BVBA/SPRL, Hermeslaan 1A, B-1831 Brüssel Deutschland und Österreich Über die Herstellergarantie hinaus haben Sie gegebenenfalls Mängelansprüche gegenüber Ihrem Verkäufer aus dem Kaufvertrag, die durch diese Herstellergarantie nicht eingeschränkt werden. Luxemburg Über die Herstellergarantie hinaus haben Sie gegebenenfalls gesetzliche Ansprüche gegenüber Ihrem Verkäufer aus dem Kaufvertrag, die durch diese Herstellergarantie nicht eingeschränkt werden. Insbesondere werden für Verbraucher folgende gesetzliche Bestimmungen von der Herstellergarantie nicht berührt: Gesetz vom 21. April 2004 bezüglich der Vertragsmässigkeit von Verbrauchsgütern und gesetzliche Bestimmungen des Zivilgesetzbuches bezüglich der Garantie. Die gesetzliche Garantie nach dem Gesetz vom 21. April 2004 ist auf zwei Jahren ab der Lieferung des Verbrauchgutes befristet. Belgien Sie haben gegebenenfalls zusätzliche Ansprüche gegenüber Ihrem Verkäufer aus dem Kaufvertrag, die durch diese HP Herstellergarantie nicht eingeschränkt werden. Belgium, France, and Luxemburg Vous trouverez, ci-après, les coordonnées de l’entité HP responsable de l'exécution de la garantie fabricant relative à votre matériel HP dans votre pays. France: En vertu de votre contrat d’achat, il se peut que vous disposiez de droits légaux supplémentaires à l’encontre de votre vendeur. Ceux-ci ne sont aucunement affectés par la présente garantie du fabricant HP. En particulier, si vous êtes un consommateur domicilié en France (départements et territoires d’outre-mer (DOM-TOM) inclus dans la limite des textes qui leur sont applicables), le vendeur reste tenu à votre égard des ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 279 défauts de conformité du bien au contrat et des vices rédhibitoires dans les conditions prévues aux articles 1641 à 1649 du Code civil. Code de la consommation: « Art. L. 211-4. - Le vendeur est tenu de livrer un bien conforme au contrat et répond des défauts de conformité existant lors de la délivrance. Il répond également des défauts de conformité résultant de l'emballage, des instructions de montage ou de l'installation lorsque celle-ci a été mise à sa charge par le contrat ou a été réalisée sous sa responsabilité. » « Art. L. 211-5. - Pour être conforme au contrat, le bien doit : 1° Etre propre à l'usage habituellement attendu d'un bien semblable et, le cas échéant correspondre à la description donnée par le vendeur et posséder les qualités que celui-ci a présentées à l'acheteur sous forme d'échantillon ou de modèle ; - présenter les qualités qu'un acheteur peut légitimement attendre eu égard aux déclarations publiques faites par le vendeur, par le producteur ou par son représentant, notamment dans la publicité ou l'étiquetage ; 2° Ou présenter les caractéristiques définies d'un commun accord par les parties ou être propre à tout usage spécial recherché par l'acheteur, porté à la connaissance du vendeur et que ce dernier a accepté. » « Art. L.211-12. – L’action résultant du défaut de conformité se prescrit par deux ans à compter de la délivrance du bien. » Code civil: « Code civil Article 1641 : Le vendeur est tenu de la garantie à raison des défauts cachés de la chose vendue qui la rendent impropre à l’usage auquel on la destine, ou qui diminuent tellement cet usage, que l’acheteur ne l’aurait pas acquise, ou n’en aurait donné qu’un moindre prix, s’il les avait connus. » « Code civil Article 1648 : L’action résultant des vices rédhibitoires doit être intentée par l’acquéreur dans un délai de deux ans à compter de la découverte du vice. » L’entité HP responsable de l'exécution de la garantie fabricant relative à votre matériel HP est : HewlettPackard France SAS, 1 Avenue du Canada 91947 LES ULIS Belgique: En vertu de votre contrat d’achat, il se peut que vous disposiez de droits légaux supplémentaires à l’encontre de votre vendeur. Ceux-ci ne sont aucunement affectés par la présente garantie du fabricant HP. L’entité HP responsable de l'exécution de la garantie fabricant relative à votre matériel HP est : HewlettPackard Belgium BVBA/SPRL, Hermeslaan 1A, B-1831 Belgique Luxembourg: En vertu de votre contrat d’achat, il se peut que vous disposiez de droits légaux supplémentaires à l’encontre de votre vendeur. Ceux-ci ne sont aucunement affectés par la présente garantie du fabricant HP. En particulier, si vous êtes un consommateur la présente garantie fabricant HP ne fait pas obstacle à l’application des dispositions de la loi du 21 avril 2004 relative à la garantie de conformité et des dispositions du Code civil relatives à la garantie. La durée de la garantie légale en vertu de la loi du 21 avril 2004 est de deux ans à compter de la délivrance du bien. L’entité HP responsable de l'exécution de la garantie fabricant relative à votre matériel HP est : HewlettPackard Luxembourg SCA, Vegacenter 75, Parc d'Activités Capellen, L-8308 Capellen 280 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Italy In allegato il cliente troverà i nomi e gli indirizzi delle Società del Gruppo HP che prestano i servizi in Garanzia (garanzia di buon funzionamento e garanzia convenzionale) in Italia. Italia: Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.r.L., Via G. Di Vittorio 9, 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio Oltre alla Garanzia del Produttore, e in modo indipendente dalla stessa, il Consumatore potrà far valere i propri diritti di legge nei confronti del venditore tra cui il diritto di chiedere, nei primi 24 mesi dalla data di acquisto del prodotto, la riparazione gratuita o la sostituzione del prodotto non conforme al contratto ai sensi dell’art. 130 del Codice del Consumo (Dlgs. 206/2005) laddove ne ricorrano le condizioni. Spain Adjunto puede encontrar el nombre y dirección de las entidades HP que ofrecen la Garantía Limitada de HP (garantía comercial adicional del fabricante) en su país. España Hewlett-Packard Española S.L.U. C/Vicente Aleixandre 1 Parque Empresarial Madrid - Las Rozas, E-28232 Madrid La garantía comercial adicional de HP (Garantía Limitada de HP) no afecta a los derechos que usted, como consumidor, pueda tener frente al vendedor por la falta de conformidad del producto con el contrato de compraventa. Dichos derechos son independientes y compatibles con la garantía comercial adicional de HP y no quedan afectados por ésta. De conformidad con los mismos, si durante un plazo de dos años desde la entrega del producto aparece alguna falta de conformidad existente en el momento de la entrega, el consumidor y usuario tiene derecho a exigir al vendedor la reparación del producto, su sustitución, la rebaja del precio o la resolución del contrato de acuerdo con lo previsto en el Título V del Real Decreto Legislativo 1/2007. Salvo prueba que demuestre lo contrario, se presumirá que las faltas de conformidad que se manifiesten en los seis meses posteriores a la entrega del producto ya existían cuando el producto se entregó. Únicamente cuando al consumidor y usuario le resulte imposible o le suponga una carga excesiva dirigirse al vendedor por la falta de conformidad con el contrato podrá reclamar directamente al fabricante con el fin de obtener la sustitución o reparación. Denmark Vedhæftet finder De navn og adresse på de HP-selskaber, som yder HP’s mangeludbedring i Danmark. Danmark: Hewlett-Packard A/S, Engholm Parkvej 8, DK-3450, Allerød Herudover kan De have opnået rettigheder overfor sælger af HP’s produkter i henhold til Deres købsaftale. HP’s regler om mangeludbedring begrænser ikke sådanne rettigheder. Norway Vedlagt finner du navn og adresse på de HP-selskaper som svarer for fabrikkgarantien i Norge. Norge: Hewlett-Packard Norge AS, Østensjøveien 32, 0667 OSLO, Norge Utover dette kan du ha oppnådd rettigheter gjennom kjøpsavtalen med selgeren av ditt HP-produkt dersom du er en forbruker etter norsk forbrukerkjøpslov. Slike rettigheter innskrenkes ikke av fabrikkgarantien. Den lengste absolutte reklamasjonsretten er 5 år for produkter som ved vanlig bruk er ment å vare vesentlig lengre enn 2 år (med de begrensninger som følger av norsk lovgivning og rettspraksis). Overfor selgeren kan det reklameres på ytelsen som helhet selv om garantien kun dekker deler av ytelsen som er kjøpt. ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 281 Reklamasjonsretten kan tapes dersom det ikke reklameres innen rimelig tid, også innenfor den absolutte reklamasjonsperioden. Sweden Av bilagda förteckning framgår namn och adress till det HP-företag som svarar för HPs begränsade garanti (fabriksgaranti) i Sverige. Sverige: Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB, SE-169 85 Stockholm Ni kan utöver denna fabriksgaranti även ha tillkommande lagstadgade rättigheter, som följer av Ert avtal med säljaren av produkten. Dessa rättigheter inskränks inte av fabriksgarantin. Portugal Anexa à presente declaração encontra-se uma lista das empresas HP de entre as quais consta o nome e morada da empresa responsável pela prestação da Garantia Limitada HP (garantia do fabricante) no seu país. Portugal: Hewlett-Packard Portugal, Lda., Edificio D. Sancho I, Quinta da Fonte, Porto Salvo, 2780-730 Paco de Arcos, P-Oeiras Além da referida garantia do fabricante prestada pela HP, poderá também beneficiar, nos termos da legislação local em vigor, de outros direitos legais relativos à garantia, ao abrigo do respectivo Contrato de Compra e Venda. A presente garantia não representará quaisquer custos adicionais para o consumidor. A presente garantia limitada não afeta os direitos dos consumidores constantes de leis locais imperativas, como seja o DecretoLei 67/2003, de 8 de Abril, com a redação que lhe foi dada pelo Decreto-Lei 84/2008, de 21 de Maio. Greece and Cyprus Συνημμένα αναφέρονται οι επωνυμίες και οι διευθύνσεις των εταιρειών της ΗΡ που παρέχουν την Περιορισμένη Εγγύηση της ΗΡ (εγγύηση κατασκευαστή) στην χώρα σας. Η εγγύηση κατασκευαστή δεν περιορίζει τα επιπλέον νόμιμα δικαιώματα που μπορεί να έχετε έναντι του πωλητή, όπως αυτά καθορίζονται στην σύμβαση αγοράς του προϊόντος. Ελλάδα /Κύπρος: Hewlett-Packard Hellas Ε.Π.Ε., Βορείου Ηπείρου 76,151 25 ΜΑΡΟΥΣΙ Hungary Ön az alábbiakban megtalálja azon HP vállalatok nevét és címét, amelyek az egyes országokban biztosítják a HP mint gyártó által vállalt Korlátozott Jótállást. Hungary: - Hewlett-Packard Magyarország Kft, H-1117 Budapest, Alíz utca 1. - Hewlett-Packard Informatikai Kft, H-1117 Budapest, Alíz utca 1. A HP Korlátozott Jótállásán túlmenően Önt a HP terméket Önnek értékesítő kereskedővel szemben megilletik a helyi kötelezően alkalmazandó és eltérést nem engedő jogszabályok által biztosított szavatossági és jótállási jogok. Az Önre vonatkozó, kötelezően alkalmazandó és eltérést nem engedő jogszabályban biztosított jogait a HP Korlátozott Jótállási nyilatkozata nem korlátozza. Czech Republic V příloze jsou uvedeny názvy a adresy společností skupiny HP, které poskytují omezenou záruku HP (záruku výrobců) ve Vaší zemi. 282 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Česká republika: Hewlett Packard s.r.o., Vyskočilova 1/1410, 140 21 Praha 4 Pokud máte na základě konkrétní kupní smlouvy vůči prodávajícímu práva ze zákona přesahující záruku vyznačenou výrobcem, pak tato práva nejsou uvedenou zárukou výrobce dotčena. Slovakia V prílohe sú uvedené mená a adresy spoločností skupiny HP, ktoré zabezpečujú plnenia z obmedzenej záruky HP (záruka výrobcu) vo vašej krajine. Slovenská republika: Hewlett-Packard Slovakia, s.r.o., Galvaniho 7, 820 02 Bratislava Pokiaľ máte na základe vašej kúpnej zmluvy voči predávajúcemu práva zo zákona presahujúce záruku výrobcu, také práva nie sú uvedenou zárukou výrobcu dotknuté. Poland W załączeniu przedstawiamy nazwy i adresy jednostek HP, odpowiedzialnych za wykonanie ograniczonej gwarancji HP w Państwa kraju. Polska: Hewlett-Packard Polska Sp. z o.o., Szturmowa 2a, 02-678 Warszawa wpisana do rejestru przedsiębiorców w Sadzie Rejonowym dla m. st. Warszawy, XIII Wydział Gospodarczy, pod numerem KRS 0000016370, E0001100WZ, kapitał zakładowy 475 000 PLN. NIP 527-020-51-28 HP informuje, że na podstawie umowy sprzedaży mogą Państwu przysługiwać wobec sprzedawcy ustawowe prawa niezależne w stosunku do udzielanej, ograniczonej gwarancji HP. Gwarancja HP nie wyłącza, nie ogranicza ani nie zawiesza uprawnień kupującego wynikających z niezgodności towaru z umową. Bulgaria Долу ще намерите името и адреса на дружеството във Вашата страна, отговорно за предоставянето на Гаранционната поддръжка в рамките на Ограничената Гаранция предоставяна от Хюлет-Пакард /HP. Хюлет-Пакард България ЕООД, с ЕИК 121909024, със седалище и адрес на управление: София 1766, рн Младост, ул. Околовръстен път № 258 Вие имате допълнителни законови права пред продавача на продукта в съответствие с договора Ви за покупко-продажба. Тези права по-никакъв начин не се ограничават от Ограничената Гаранция предоставяна от HP. При необходимост, моля да се обърнете към продавача на продукта. Romania Mai jos am inclus numele si adresa entitatii HP care este responsabila cu indeplinirea obligatiilor aferente Garantiei Producatorului HP in tara dvs. Romănia: Hewlett-Packard Romănia SRL, Bd. Lascăr Catargiu nr. 47-53, Europe House Business Center, Et 3, Sector 1, Bucureşti Aveti drepturi legale suplimentare impotriva vanzatorului pe baza contractului de achizitie. Aceste drepturi nu sunt afectate de Garantia Producatorului HP. Va rugam sa contactati vanzatorul. Belgium and The Netherlands Als bijlage ontvangt u hierbij een lijst met daarop de naam en het adres van de HP vestiging in uw land waar u terecht kunt voor de HP fabrieksgarantie. ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 283 Nederland: Hewlett-Packard Nederland BV, Startbaan 16, 1187 XR Amstelveen België: Hewlett-Packard, BVBA/SPRL, P.O. Naast deze fabrieksgarantie kunt u op basis van nationale wetgeving ten opzichte van uw verkoper rechten ontlenen aan de verkoopovereenkomst. De HP-fabrieksgarantie laat de wettelijke rechten onder de toepasselijke nationale wetgeving ongemoeid. Finland Oheisesta luettelosta löydätte yhteystiedot valmistajan takuusta vastaavaan HP:n edustajaan maassanne. Suomi: Hewlett-Packard Oy, Piispankalliontie, FIN - 02200 Espoo Teillä voi olla oikeus esittää takuun lisäksi vaatimuksia myös lain nojalla. Valmistajan takuu ei rajoita lakiin perustuvia oikeuksianne. Slovenia V prilogi vam pošiljamo imena in naslove HP-jevih skupin, pri katerih lahko v svoji državi uveljavljate HP-jevo omejeno garancijo (garancijo proizvajalca). Slovenija: Hewlett - Packard d.o.o.,Tivolska cesta 48, 1000 Ljubljana, Slovenija Poleg garancije proizvajalca imate lahko na osnovi nakupne pogodbe tudi z zakonom predpisane pravice do prodajalca, ki jih ne omejuje ta garancija proizvajalca. Croatia Naziv i adresa HP–ovog subjekta koji je odgovoran za ispunjenje HP-ovog Ograničenog jamstva u Vašoj zemlji su: Hewlett-Packard d.o.o. Radnička cesta 41 10000 Zagreb 01/60 60 200 Na temelju svog kupoprodajnog ugovora, možete imati dodatna zakonska prava u odnosu na prodavatelja. Ovo HP-ovo Ograničeno jamstvo ni na koji način ne utječe na ta dodatna prava. Latvia Pielikumā ir norādīti to HP uzņēmumu nosaukumi un adreses, kas sniedz HP ierobežoto servisa nodrošinājumu (ražotāja servisa nodrošinājumu) jūsu valstī. Latvija: Hewlett-Packard SIA, Duntes iela 17a, Rīga, LV-1005, Latvija Papildus ražotāja servisa nodrošinājumam likumdošanas aktos jums var būt paredzētas citas uz pirkuma līgumu balstītas pret pārdevēju izmantojamas tiesības, kas netiek ierobežotas ar šo ražotāja servisa nodrošinājumu. Lithuania Pridedami HP bendrovių, teikiančių HP garantiją (gamintojo garantiją) Jūsų šalyje, pavadinimai ir adresai. 284 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Lietuva: UAB „Hewlett-Packard“, V. Gerulaičio g. 1, LT-08200 Vilnius Pagal taikytinus vartojimo prekių pardavimą reglamentuojančius nacionalinius teisės aktus, jūs taip pat turite įstatymų galios teises. Gamintojo garantija jūsų įstatymų galią turinčių teisių jokiu būdu neapriboja ir joms poveikio neturi. Estonia Lisatud on nende HP üksuste nimed ja aadressid, kes teie riigis HP müügigarantiid teostavad. Eesti: HP Oy Eesti Filiaal, A.H. Tammsaare tee 47, EE-11316 Tallinn Lisaks HP müügigarantiile võib teil olla nõudeid müüja vastu seoses ostu lepingutingimustele mittevastavusega. Käesolev HP müügigarantii ei piira teie nimetatud õigusi. ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 285 End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and (b) HewlettPackard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”). RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT. 1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as “license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code. 2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: 3. a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product (for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software. b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for back-up purposes. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement (collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail. 286 Appendix A Service and support ENWW 4. TRANSFER. a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated. b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA. 5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software. 6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law. 7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services. 8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws. 10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. 11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 04/09 ENWW End User License Agreement 287 OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http:// www.openssl.org/) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). 288 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service 289 Customer support Get telephone support for your country/region Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. Get 24-hour Internet support Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. ● In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 or www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585. ● Outside the US, go to www.hp.com/support. Select your country/region. Click Troubleshooting. Enter the product name, and then select Search. ● In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 or www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585. Click Drivers & Software. ● Outside the US, go to www.hp.com/support. Select your country/region. Click Drivers & Software. Enter the product name (for example, “LaserJet M575”), and then select Search. Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack Register your product www.register.hp.com 290 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B ENWW Product specifications ● Physical specifications (X555 models) ● Physical specifications (X585 models) ● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ● Environmental specifications 291 Physical specifications (X555 models) Table B-1 Physical specifications (X555 models), with ink cartridges Product Height Depth Width Weight X555dn 406 mm (16 in) 399 mm (15.7 in) 515 mm (20.3 in) 21.9 kg (48.2 lb) X555xh 545 mm (21.5 in) 27.2 kg (60 lb) Physical specifications (X585 models) Table B-2 Physical specifications (X585 models), with ink cartridges Product Height Depth Width Weight X585dn 594 mm (23.4 in) 545 mm (21.5 in) 515 mm (20.3 in) 34.8 kg (76.8 lb) X585f 34.9 kg (76.86 lb) X585z 35.3 kg (77.9 lb) Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions See www.hp.com/support/ojcolorX555 or www.hp.com/support/ojcolorMFPX585 for current information. CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty. Environmental specifications Table B-3 Operating-environment specifications Environment Recommended Allowed Temperature 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F) Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH Altitude Not applicable 0 to 3048 m (0 to 10,000 ft) 292 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW C ENWW Regulatory information ● FCC regulations ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Declaration of conformity (X555 models) ● Declaration of conformity (X585dn model) ● Declaration of conformity (X585f and X585z models) ● Certificate of volatility (X555 models) ● Certificate of volatility (X585 models) ● Safety statements ● Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 293 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 294 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment. Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3). Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. Hewlett-Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR® logo is qualified to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products: Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar Paper use This product’s manual/automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life. HP Officejet print supplies HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP Officejet ink cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible! NOTE: Go to www.hp.com/recycle for complete recycling information and to order postage paid labels, envelopes, or boxes, for recycling. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 295 Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico Go to www.hp.com/recycle for complete recycling information and to order post-paid labels and envelopes or boxes. Please follow the applicable instructions below. Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) 1. Package each HP Officejet ink cartridge in its original box and bag. 2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg (70 lb). 3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. OR 1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP Deskjet ink cartridges). 2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. Single returns 1. Package the HP Officejet ink cartridge in its original bag and box. 2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box. Shipping For US and Puerto Rico HP Officejet ink cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS driver during your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. (Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates.) For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com. If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates.) Or, you can drop off your packaged ink cartridge(s) at any U.S. Post Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com. For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center/store, please call 1-800-GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com. For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice. Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for Alaska and Hawaii. Non-U.S. returns To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP Officejet printing supplies. 296 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets HP guidelines. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury. This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following: HP Officejet Enterprise Color X555 and MFP X585 Series Type Lithium Manganese Dioxide Weight 3.0 g Location On main board User-removable No For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service, or go to: www.hp.com/recycle. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 297 Electronic hardware recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware. For more information about recycling programs go to: www.hp.com/recycle. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/ reach. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, ink) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds. EPEAT Many HP products are designed to meet EPEAT. EPEAT is a comprehensive environmental rating that helps identify greener electronics equipment. For more information on EPEAT go to www.epeat.net. For information on HP's EPEAT registered products go to www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/ pdf/epeat_printers.pdf. For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics: ● Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products ● HP’s commitment to the environment ● HP’s environmental management system ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets Visit www.hp.com/go/environment. 298 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity (X555 models) Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard DoC#: BOISB-1300-00-R1 Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP Officejet Enterprise Color X555dn and HP Officejet Enterprise Color X555xh Regulatory Model:1) BOISB-1300-00 Product Accessory: B5L07A — HP Officejet Enterprise 500-sheet paper tray Ink Cartridges: ● D8J03A — HP 980 STARTUP Cyan Officejet Cartridge ● D8J04A — HP 980 STARTUP Magenta Officejet Cartridge ● D8J05A — HP 980 STARTUP Yellow Officejet Cartridge ● D8J06A — HP 980 STARTUP Black Officejet Cartridge ● D8J07A — HP 980A Cyan Officejet Cartridge ● D8J08A — HP 980A Magenta Officejet Cartridge ● D8J09A — HP 980A Yellow Officejet Cartridge ● D8J10A — HP 980A Black Officejet Cartridge conforms to the following Product Specifications and Regulations: EMC: CISPR 22:2008 / EN55022:2010 Class A CISPR 24:1997 +A1:2001 +A2:2002 / EN55024:2010 EN 61000-3-2:2006 +A1:2009 +A2:2009 EN 61000-3-3:2008 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A2) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003 SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 +A1:2009/ EN60950-1: 2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) IEC 62479:2010 / EN 62479:2010 GB4943.1-2011 RoHS: EN 50581:2012 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU and carries the ENWW marking accordingly. Declaration of conformity (X555 models) 299 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Additional information: 1. This product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number which stays with the regulatory aspects of the design. The Regulatory Model Number is the main product identifier in the regulatory documentation and test reports, this number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product numbers. 2. The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.” Boise, Idaho USA July 2013 For Regulatory Topics only, contact: European Contact: Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany www.hp.eu/certificates USA Contact: Hewlett-Packard, 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304, U.S.A. 650-857-1501 300 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity (X585dn model) Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard DoC#: BOISB-1300-01-R1 Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP Officejet Enterprise Color MFP X585dn Regulatory Model:1) BOISB-1300-01 Product Accessory: B5L07A - HP Officejet Enterprise 500-sheet paper tray Ink Cartridges: ● D8J03A — HP 980 STARTUP Cyan Officejet Cartridge ● D8J04A — HP 980 STARTUP Magenta Officejet Cartridge ● D8J05A — HP 980 STARTUP Yellow Officejet Cartridge ● D8J06A — HP 980 STARTUP Black Officejet Cartridge ● D8J07A — HP 980A Cyan Officejet Cartridge ● D8J08A — HP 980A Magenta Officejet Cartridge ● D8J09A — HP 980A Yellow Officejet Cartridge ● D8J10A — HP 980A Black Officejet Cartridge conforms to the following Product Specifications and Regulations: EMC: CISPR 22:2008 / EN55022:2010 Class A CISPR 24:1997 +A1:2001 +A2:2002 / EN55024:2010 EN 61000-3-2:2006 +A1:2009 +A2:2009 EN 61000-3-3:2008 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A2) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003 SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 +A1:2009/ EN60950-1: 2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) IEC 62479:2010 / EN 62479:2010 GB4943.1-2011 RoHS: EN 50581:2012 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU and carries the ENWW marking accordingly. Declaration of conformity (X585dn model) 301 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. This product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number which stays with the regulatory aspects of the design. The Regulatory Model Number is the main product identifier in the regulatory documentation and test reports, this number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product numbers. 2. The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.” Boise, Idaho USA July 2013 For Regulatory Topics only, contact: European Contact: Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany www.hp.eu/certificates USA Contact: Hewlett-Packard, 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304, U.S.A. 650-857-1501 302 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Declaration of conformity (X585f and X585z models) Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard DoC#: BOISB-1300-02-R1 Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP Officejet Enterprise Color MFP X585f and HP Officejet Enterprise Color Flow MFP X585z Regulatory Model:1) BOISB-1300-02 Product Accessories: BOISB-0703-00 (Fax module)2) B5L07A - HP Officejet Enterprise 500-sheet paper tray Ink Cartridges: ● D8J03A — HP 980 STARTUP Cyan Officejet Cartridge ● D8J04A — HP 980 STARTUP Magenta Officejet Cartridge ● D8J05A — HP 980 STARTUP Yellow Officejet Cartridge ● D8J06A — HP 980 STARTUP Black Officejet Cartridge ● D8J07A — HP 980A Cyan Officejet Cartridge ● D8J08A — HP 980A Magenta Officejet Cartridge ● D8J09A — HP 980A Yellow Officejet Cartridge ● D8J10A — HP 980A Black Officejet Cartridge conforms to the following Product Specifications and Regulations: EMC: CISPR 22:2008 / EN55022:2010 Class A CISPR 24:1997 +A1:2001 +A2:2002 / EN55024:2010 EN 61000-3-2:2006 +A1:2009 +A2:2009 EN 61000-3-3:2008 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A3) / ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003 SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 +A1:2009/ EN60950-1: 2006 +A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) IEC 62479:2010 / EN 62479:2010 GB4943.1-2011 TELECOM: ES 203 021 FCC Rules and Regulations 47 CFR Part 68 RoHS: EN 50581:2012 Supplementary Information: ENWW Declaration of conformity (X585f and X585z models) 303 The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU and carries the marking accordingly. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. This product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number which stays with the regulatory aspects of the design. The Regulatory Model Number is the main product identifier in the regulatory documentation and test reports, this number should not be confused with the marketing name or the product numbers. 2. This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model number is: BOISB-0703-00 as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold. 3. The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.” 4. Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those listed above. Boise, Idaho USA July 2013 For Regulatory Topics only, contact: European Contact: Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany www.hp.eu/certificates USA Contact: Hewlett-Packard, 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304, U.S.A. 650-857-1501 304 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Certificate of volatility (X555 models) Figure C-1 Certificate of volatility (X555 models) (1 of 2) Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility Part Number: Address: X555dn = C2S11A, X555xh = C2S12A Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714 Volatile Memory Model: HP Officejet Enterprise color SFP X555 series Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: DRAM 1.25 GB User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Used for temporary storage of data during scan or print job processes, and for applications that are running on the OS. When the device is powered off the memory is erased. Non-Volatile Memory Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: SPI Flash 12 MB Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: EEPROM 32 KB User Modifiable: Yes No User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Contains boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function. User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images. There are no steps to clear this data. Function: Steps to clear memory: Backup device for critical system counters and product configuration information. There are no steps to clear this data. Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (HDD, Tape, etc): HDD Size: 320 GB User Modifiable: Yes No (HDD is standard on xh model) Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: SSD 8 GB User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Stores customer data, OS, applications, digitally signed firmware images, persistent data, and temporary data used for processing and system functions. There are several ways to erase this: 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted Disk – This changes the encryption keys rendering all data unreadable. 2. Secure Storage Erase – Erases temporary files and job data by overwriting information one or three times. 3. Secure Disk Erase – Industry standard ATA Secure Erase. Overwrites all data on the HDD. 4. Secure File Erase – Erases files when jobs finish processing by overwriting them one or three times. Function: Steps to clear memory: See HDD function above. See HDD Steps to clear memory above. (SSD is standard on dn model) ENWW Certificate of volatility (X555 models) 305 Figure C-2 Certificate of volatility (X555 models) (2 of 2) USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)? Yes No If Yes please describe below rd Description: Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3 party application loading, Restore encrypted backed-up system settings. USB ports can be disabled. Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Back-up of encrypted system settings. RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Yes No If Yes please describe below Bluetooth) Purpose: Wireless information string. Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? below: Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data Yes No If Yes please describe below: whatsoever? Purpose: Specifications: Author Information Name: Title: Technical Marketing Engineer Email: @hp.com Business Unit: Date Prepared: 02-14-14 306 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Certificate of volatility (X585 models) Figure C-3 Certificate of volatility (X585 models) (1 of 2) Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility Part Number: Address: X585dn = B5L04A, X585f = B5L05A, Hewlett Packard Company X585z = B5L06A 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise, ID 83714 Volatile Memory Model: HP Officejet Enterprise color MFP X585 series Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: DRAM 1.75 GB User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Used for temporary storage of data during scan or print job processes, and for applications that are running on the OS. When the device is powered off the memory is erased. Non-Volatile Memory Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: SPI Flash 12 MB Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: EEPROM 36 KB User Modifiable: Yes No User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Contains boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function. User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images. There are no steps to clear this data. Function: Steps to clear memory: Backup device for critical system counters and product configuration information. There are no steps to clear this data. Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)? Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: HDD, Self Encrypting, SATA 320 GB User Modifiable: Yes No Function: Steps to clear memory: Stores customer data, OS, applications, digitally signed firmware images, persistent data, and temporary data used for processing and system functions. There are several ways to erase this: 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted Disk – This changes the encryption keys rendering all data unreadable. 2. Secure Storage Erase – Erases temporary files and job data by overwriting information one or three times. 3. Secure Disk Erase – Industry standard ATA Secure Erase. Overwrites all data on the HDD. 4. Secure File Erase – Erases files when jobs finish processing by overwriting them one or three times. USB Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)? Yes No If Yes please describe below rd Description: Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3 party application loading, Restore encrypted backed-up ENWW Certificate of volatility (X585 models) 307 Figure C-4 Certificate of volatility (X585 models) (2 of 2) system settings. USB ports can be disabled. Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)? Yes No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Back-up of encrypted system settings. RF/RFID Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone, Yes No If Yes please describe below Bluetooth) Purpose: Wireless information string. Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything Yes No If Yes please describe other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? below: Purpose: Frequency: Bandwidth: Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP): Specifications: Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data Yes No If Yes please describe below: whatsoever? Purpose: Fax modem – send/receive fax data Specifications: 33.6 kbs Author Information Name: Title: Technical Marketing Engineer Email: @hp.com Business Unit: Date Prepared: 02-14-14 308 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Safety statements Canada - Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Statement CAN ICES-3(A)/NMB-3(A) VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord instructions Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz. Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product. Power cord statement (Japan) EMC statement (China) EMC statement (Korea) ENWW Safety statements 309 EMI statement (Taiwan) 310 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW GS statement (Germany) Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden. Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Substances Table (China) SEPA Ecolabel User Information (China) 中国环境标识认证产品用户说明 噪声大于 63.0 dB(A)的办公设备不宜放置于办公室内,请在独立的隔离区域使用。 如需长时间使用本产品或打印大量文件,请确保在通风良好的房间内使用。 如您需要确认本产品处于零能耗状态,请按下电源关闭按钮,并将插头从电源插座断开。 您可以使用再生纸,以减少资源耗费。 ENWW Safety statements 311 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (India) This product complies with the "India E-waste Rule 2011" and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Ukraine) Обладнання відповідає вимогам Технічного регламенту щодо обмеження використання деяких небезпечних речовин в електричному та електронному обладнанні, затвердженого постановою Кабінету Міністрів України від 3 грудня 2008 № 1057 Eurasian Conformity (Belarus, Kazakhstan, Russia) 312 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Additional statements for telecom (fax) products EU Statement for Telecom Operation This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks (PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking. For more details see Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual. However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN. Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual. If you experience network compatibility issues, please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-Packard help desk in the country/region of operation. Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the local PSTN operator. New Zealand Telecom Statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services. This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line. This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service. This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for New Zealand. Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US) This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices, which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C. An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. ENWW Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 313 If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in this manual for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved. The customer can do the following repairs: Replace any original equipment that came with the device. This includes the toner cartridge, the supports for trays and bins, the power cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges. Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, or other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges). Industry Canada CS-03 requirements Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of this device is 0.0. This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le présent matériel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada. Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). / L’indice d’équivalence de la 314 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas cinq. The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A. Vietnam Telecom wired/wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products Japan Telecom Mark A08-0138004 ENWW Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 315 316 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index A accessories installed, information 59 acoustic specifications 292 Administration menu, control panel 172 B Backup/Restore menu, control panel 233 batteries included 297 bin, output jams, clearing 252 C Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control panel 233 calibration period 4 cautions iii certificate of volatility 305, 307 clean the paper path cleaning page printing 164 cleaning paper path 236 CO operations 37 components diagrams of 154 configuration pages information 59 printing 57 connectivity solving problems 256 connectivity LED 149 control panel Administration menu 172 Backup/Restore menu 233 Calibrate/Cleaning menu 233 Copy Settings menu (X585 only) 179 ENWW Display Settings menu 211 Fax Settings menu (X585) 195 General Settings menu 174 Manage Supplies menu 213 Manage Trays menu 217 Network Settings menu 219 Print Options menu 210 Print Settings menu 207 Reports menu 172 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585) 185 Service menu 235 Troubleshooting menu 230 USB Firmware Upgrade menu 235 control panel diagnostic flowcharts 50 control-panel menus 172 conventions, document iii Copy Settings menu (X585 only), control panel 179 copying sequence 36 current control, fax line 38 customer support online 290 D data path fax 38 date codes for firmware 59 manufacture 58 defaults, restoring 262 determine problem source 45 diagnostics LED 149 networks 225 Display Settings menu, control panel 211 disposal, end-of-life 297 document conventions iii document feeder jams 239 paper-feeding problems 237 E electrical specifications 292 electronic hardware recycling 298 end of print job period 6 end-of-life disposal 297 engine control system operations 7 environmental stewardship program 295 Eurasian conformity 312 event log clear 60 information 59 print 59 view 59 event-log messages 59 F factory-set defaults, restoring 262 fax card 37 data path 38 factory-set defaults, restoring 262 flash memory storage 39 functions 37 line current control 38 operations 37 page storage 39 PSTN operations 37 ring detect 38 safety isolation 38 Index 317 safety protection circuitry 38 subsystem 37 fax card CODEC 37 DSP 37 fax subsystem 37 regional versions 37 ring detect 38 fax security security features, computer 37 security features, network 37 Fax Settings menu (X585), control panel 195 fax subsystem fax card 37 operations 37 FCC regulations 294 firmware date codes 59 version information 58 flash memory, fax 39 flowcharts troubleshooting 45 formatter lights 149 G General Settings menu, control panel 174 H hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning 56 home button is unresponsive 55 HP Customer Care 290 HP embedded Jetdirect page 58 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 58 lights 149 I individual component disagnostics 149 ink collection unit jams 248 installation verify for optional accessories 57 IPv4 information 58 IPv6 information 58 318 Index J jack locations 154 jams auto-navigation 238 causes of 238 diagnostic test for 151 document feeder 239 ink collection unit 248 output bin, clearing 252 paper path, clearing 247 Japanese VCCI statement 309 Jetdirect print server lights 149 K Korean EMC statement 309 L LEDs. See lights left door jams, clearing 247 license, software 286 lights formatter 149 troubleshooting with 149 line current control, fax 38 link speed settings 229 M Manage Supplies menu, control panel 213 Manage Trays menu, control panel 217 material restrictions 297 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 298 memory flash, fax 39 information 57 menus, control panel Administration 172 Backup/Restore 233 Calibrate/Cleaning 233 Copy Settings (X585 only) 179 Display Settings 211 Fax Settings (X585) 195 General Settings 174 Manage Supplies 213 Manage Trays 217 Network Settings 219 Print Options 210 Print Settings 207 Reports 172 Scan/Digital Send Settings (X585) 185 Service 235 Troubleshooting 230 USB Firmware Upgrade 235 mercury-free product 297 model number 58 N Network Settings menu, control panel 219 networks diagnostics 225 HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 58 link speed settings 229 security features 37 no control panel sound 54 notes iii O online support 290 operation sequence 4 operations engine control system 7 fax 37 fax card in subsystem 37 fax subsystem 37 fax, PSTN 37 paper-handling system 17 PSTN 37 scanner system 35 output bin jams, clearing 252 P paper jams 238 paper-handling system operations 17 paper jams document feeder 239 ink collection unit 248 paper path diagnostic test 151 jams, clearing 247 paper pickup problems solving 237 ENWW paper-handling system sensors 17 physical specifications 292 plug/jack locations 154 port configuration information 58 port locations 154 power consumption 292 fax line current control 38 power subsystem 46 power supply troubleshooting 46 power-on scanner sequence 35 power-on troubleshooting overview 46 preboot menu options 164 Print Options menu, control panel 210 print preparation period 5 print quality built-in troubleshooting pages 156 test pages 156 print quality page interpreting 156 printing 156 print quality troubleshooting 156 Print Settings menu, control panel 207 Print Test Page 177 printing period 5 problem-solving event-log messages 59 networks 225 no response 254 slow response 254 product fax, functions 37 product cold reset 263 PSTN operations 37 R recycling electronic hardware 298 HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 296 regional versions fax card 37 Reports menu, control panel 172 ENWW restore the service ID 262 restoring factory-set defaults ring detect fax card 38 RING operations 37 262 S safety -protection circuitry, fax 38 isolation, fax 38 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (X585), control panel 185 scanner tests X585 152 security features computer 37 network 37 security settings information 58 sensors paper-handling operations 17 Service menu, control panel 235 servicing operations 4 settings factory-set defaults, restoring 262 size specifications, product 292 software software license agreement 286 solving network problems 256 USB direct-connect problems 256 specifications electrical and acoustic 292 physical 292 startup period 4 storing fax pages in flash memory 39 support online 290 T Taiwan EMI statement 310 TCP/IP information 58 technical support online 290 tests networks 225 paper path 151 scanner tests 152 scanner X585 152 theory of operations engine control system 7 paper-handling system 17 TIP operations 37 tips iii touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) 51 touchscreen has an unresponsive zone 53 touchscreen is slow to respond 52 Tray 1 jams, clearing 244 tray 1 pickup-and-feed system operations 17 Tray 2 jams, clearing 251, 253 tray 2 paper-handling operations 17 tray selection - use requested tray 217 trays jams, clearing 251, 253 paper-handling system operations 17 troubleshooting checklist 42 clean the paper path 164 configuration pages for 57 control panel checks 47 flowchart 45 jams 238 lights, using 149 network problems 256 paper feed problems 237 power 46 process 45 scanner calibration 47 scanning subsystem (M880) 47 USB direct-connect problems 256 Troubleshooting menu, control panel 230 U understand lights on the formatter formatter lights 149 Index 319 understand the lights on the formatter connectivity LED 150 heartbeat LED 149 HP Jetdirect LEDs 150 USB Firmware Upgrade menu, control panel 235 Use Requested Tray 217 V version, hardware firmware 58 W warnings iii warranty customer self repair 289 license 286 product 278 waste disposal 297 Web sites customer support 290 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 298 320 Index ENWW © 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Author : HP LaserJet Information Engineering Create Date : 2014:02:26 12:35:39-07:00 Keywords : Edition, 1, 4/2014 Modify Date : 2014:02:26 12:36:04-07:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Metadata Date : 2014:02:26 12:36:04-07:00 Format : application/pdf Title : Officejet Enterprise Color X555/X585 troubleshooting manual - enww Creator : HP LaserJet Information Engineering Subject : Edition 1 4/2014 Document ID : uuid:8b68aa37-3838-4b78-babe-bb68188140bc Instance ID : uuid:7c1e2f1d-0ead-4879-a04a-11efff690db8 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 338EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools